τεεοτοε; πα ενν ν προς ἐξδο 
® ce e@ 8 @ be CPHKES HH ΥΥ  Ν EERE Χ  ΕΥΥ 


Cee 


| me 


on rem \\ 441) > Τὺ ον Ὴ} 1 
ΠΟ ΝΟ 

4 Ὶ ὶ Ὁ 6. 4 γ ὁ 5 
ἘΝ ν᾽ π 4 ΓΑ ΝΣ. 
3: ar Fare, fy & Ry . 
+. SEU ΦΈΡΕ; = 
2 


>> . te ΚΞ," ἣ 
a i ie > : 
τ Ὁ YA YEE A Sater 2PR iF 
ἴα {κων Nie WE 
eis ¥ "Ὁ f i . 5 Ἢ ᾿ ἔχ c = 2 
, ; 


cs ο ΣΞΙΞσοζο» 


GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 


| PEARSON 


τ UC-NRLF 
| 


" 
iti 
iil 
: 
: 


GIFT OF 


SEED RRR SRE 
Li ie tie δὲ: 


a τι πσινσσας πᾶσαι 


""] 


Dee 


Bam. Weth- Wiheler 
Bur beplimbern 4. 1908 
kX JS 


teas 


ἘΔ ve, 


et ; 
sent et 


rag Lk 


a ᾿ 
ν Ὗ 
He nes 
bat 


ree 


AY) π΄. 4 
ἮΝ shines 


ἰδ 


* Late 
yin τὰ RAE Oe 


aN ee 
ἊΝ ν᾽ rat 


ies oN Nae 
oma We εἰν σι pal : : 7 i 
(eiy rs dei J ¥ 1G dey } “4 2 0 a 
τὰ va : 12 hy Nes a ἀν ἐπ ty 4 ὦν, ey. Hai 
et waite TERE BOS ib aha a oe Lee as | 
oat es ὙΠ ian fe , ΕΣ eae 


᾿ 


.. 7. 


an 
He 


ν 


. ee, οἷ = 
Sone 


4 


“ 


ν hae as 
| Yate Fie Doh aae Ἂ 
| Keone sie) ΟΝ ΔΗ 
Anan A AE a 
| Moa ΡΠ ΚΝ SB Ma ΠΥ ree} 
« % ri J ! τῇ ᾿ | 
| | | i i ; - 5 
β ἑ ‘ : oe: ΤῊΣ Υ̓ 4 At 
Abra Sie AN | io, fie td ἥ γ 
Aan t Ne 
Pt tas are ; [ i 
WL RS ; ἧς | 
bbe i ed Me ey ἐ ἵ 


Digitized by the:Internet Archive 
in 2007 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/greekprosecomposOOpearrich 


GREEK 


PROSE COMPOSITION 


BY 


HENRY CARR PEARSON, A.B., HARvarD 


HORACE MANN SCHOOL, TEACHERS COLLEGE, NEW YORK 
2 ) οὗ, 2 ζ ᾿ ᾽ 
“to -— = "9 κι 


NEW YORK::. CINCINNATI -:- CHICAGO 
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 


CopyRIGHT, 1897, BY 
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 


PEARSON, GREEK PROSE 


WwW. F.. 


PREFACE 


THE aim of this book is (1) to combine a thorough and sys- 
tematic study of the essentials of Greek syntax with abundant 
practice in translating connected English into Attic Greek; and 
(2) to afford constant practice in writing Greek at sight. 

Part I contains, in graded lessons, the principal points of Greek 
syntax, the unusual and non-essential being purposely omitted. 
These lessons are designed for use at the beginning of the second 
year’s study of Greek, thereby serving as a partial review of the 
first year’s work and as an introduction to the composition work 
in connection with the reading of Xenophon’s Anabasis. 

Part II contains short, simple English sentences, based on 
Books I-IV of the Anabasis. These should be used daily in 
connection with the reading of the text. 

Part III contains connected English prose, based on Books 
I-IV of the Anabasis. This is carefully graded, so that the stu- 
dent who performs faithfully the work outlined here will be able to 
pass the entrance examination of any of the American colleges. 

The method of writing Greek at sight used in this book needs a 
word of explanation. It is the outgrowth of the author’s personal 
experience in the classroom, and his belief that the best results 
can be obtained only by systematic practice in connection with 
the regular work. 

At intervals, review lessons are introduced, containing a list of 
the important words and an enumeration of the principal con- 


3 


4 ftec | 4 SES §6* PRERACE 


structions used in the preceding:sentences. The instructor should 
form original work for his class to translate at sight, based on these 
words and constructions. While, strictly speaking, this is not sight 
work, it enables the student to make definite preparation for this 
kind of work, and gives him valuable practice in the offhand use 
of words and principles of grammar. Furthermore, it enables the 
teacher to vary the difficulty of the work to suit the ability of his 
class. 

The connected prose at the beginning of Part III has been made 
very simple, so that Part II may be omitted by those instructors 
who do not find time to do composition work along with the first 
reading of Xenophon. The best results, however, will be obtained 
from a completion of all the work here given. 

The author is in full sympathy with the tendency to read other 
prose works than Xenophon’s Anabasis in college preparatory work, 
and would have been glad to incorporate in this book exercises 
based on other prose authors than Xenophon. ‘The wide diversity 
of opinion, however, as to just what authors should be read, and 
the fact that Xenophon’s Anabasis is made the basis of the com- 
position requirement by nearly all the colleges, has made it prac- 
tically impossible to prepare such exercises at present. 

The author acknowledges his indebtedness to many of the text- 
books in Greek Composition. | 

Mr. C. J. Geer, of the English department of the Shady Side 
Academy, Pittsburg, has given valuable assistance in the prepara- 
tion of the English work of Parts II and III. 

The author desires especially to thank William R. Crabbe, Ph.D., 
the principal of Shady Side Academy, for his assistance and kind 
encouragement. As a successful Greek instructor of long expe- 
rience, his advice in the formation of this book and his criticism 
in the correction of the manuscript have been invaluable. 


HENRY CARR PEARSON. 


LESSON 


TASLE..OF CON FEN TS 


PART I 
The Article. The Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative 
Cases : 
The Genitive ΡῈ 


The Dative Case 
Pronouns: Demonstrative, iatcnnionive: indlesinite, Rela- 
tive 


Pronouns : Persona Direct ahi Tndineck Reflexives, Pos- 
sessive, αὐτός. 
Review with Sight Pricticn 
Tenses, Exhortations, Commands, and Prohibitions 
Causal Clauses, Interrogative Subjunctive, Subjunctive 
and Future Indicative with od μή. 
Wishes. Ought and Must 
Purpose and Object Clauses . 
Review with Sight Practice. 
System . Meee «ster eS eer s 
Particular Coniittons: Simple and Contrary to Fact . 
Particular Conditions: Vivid and Less Vivid Future . 
General Conditions . 5 ae CORR Gigs Se ek 
OVS: CONGHIONS.: δοῖ ΠΝ ao Se τὰ OH eee 
Review with Sight Practice 
Before and Until 
Indirect Discourse. 
Indirect Discourse. Infinitive and Participle 
Indirect Discourse. Complex Sentences . 
Review with Sight Practice. Synopsis of οἶδα. 
The Infinitive.. Result Clauses . rae 
οτος ek etme ἐς 


The Second Aorist Tense 


Simple Sentences 


PAGE 


6 TABLE OF CONTENTS 


PART II 


πα tie CONNMEOTIURG oer ete ee a ng Ng Jenne tee ae 
ΑΝ ON TRANSLATION * αν τὸς το νων 
EXERCISES BASED ON THE ANABASIS: 


EPS re a eyelets Sea arte, Sal oa nat ow ΤΠ aes hae oe 
ROOM EE ssh) a as νῦν No eel Be οἰ Sn ak eek he ee Ἂς 
EMIORSELE Sa a ee ee es nas te Se) a eee eS 
BOOBY,” Wie na ise et pacer Riche ae Row be hh ace eee 


PART III 


EXERCISES BASED ON THE ANABASIS: 


Bree o> Mire ar test gece cel adi eae τὰ UE ay a ΝΣ ar ne δ 8 
SOT ose FS I Sack Cy OR Og Ne ae 
WSC ἘΠῚ τς τὸς οὐ το τος A ee are Bey 
BOGE a ae ΕΣ παν εν ον ee ΧΗ͂Ν 

ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY . . Ὁ + © «© «© © + + «+ 173 


MR MINA TION PAPERS τ πὰ ον τ τ as es τ see 


The grammatical references are to the Greek Grammars in most common 
use; H. = Hadley-Allen. G.= Goodwin. Β. = Babbitt. Go. = Goodell. 


GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 


LESSON I 


THE ARTICLE—THE NOMINATIVE, VOCATIVE, AND 
ACCUSATIVE CASES 


1. The definite article, ὁ, ἣ, τό, generally corresponds 
to our article ¢he. 


2. An adjective or other word qualifying a noun is said 
to be in the Attributive position when it follows the article 
directly. It is in the Predicate position when it does not 
directly follow its article. 


ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION 
ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ 
ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγαθός 
ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγαθός 


The brave man. 


PREDICATE POSITION 

ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός 
ἀγαθὸς ὁ ἀνήρ 

ΓΗ, 666-670: G. 959-963, 971-973: B. 451-453: Go. 552.] 


The man ts brave. 


3. The following are some important facts to remember 
about the use of the article: 


1. The article is often used as a possessive pronoun when 
such a meaning is obvious: ἣ δὲ μήτηρ ἀποπέμπει ἔπὶ τὴν 
ἀρχήν, λῆς mother sends him back to his province. [H. 658: 
G. 949: B. 447: Go. 551, @.] 

7 


8 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


2. Names of persons usually omit the article. Yet they 
often take it, to mark them as before mentioned or well 
known: ὁ Κῦρος, Cyrus. [Η. 663: 6. 943: B. 446: Go. 551, @.] 

3. Abstract nouns often take the article: ἣ ἀρετή, v27- 
tue ; ἡ δικαιοσύνη, justice. [H. 659: G. 944: B. 448: Go. 551, ὁ. 

4. The article is generally omitted with βασιλεύς when 
referring to the king of Persia. [H. 660, ε: G. 957: B. 446, n.] 

5. The demoeastrative pronouns οὗτος, ὅδε, and ἐκεῖνος 
usually have the predicate position: οὗτος ὁ στρατιώτης, “΄ 
this soldier. [H. 673: 6. 974: B. 456: Go. 553.] 

6. πᾶς, ἅπας, σύμπας, and ὅλος generally have the 
predicate position. So with μέσος, meaning the middle of: 
μέση ἡ χώρα, the middle of the country (while ἣ μέση χώρα 
would mean the middle country). [H. 672: G. 979: B. 454, 455-] 

7. The article has a demonstrative force before pév and 


δέ in expressing contrast: ὁ μέν... ὁ δέ, cis man... that 
man, the one... the other. [H.654: G. 981: B. 443, 1: Go. 549, 4. 


8/ Adverbs and limiting phrases, such as prepositions 
and their cases, may be used with the article and noun. 
The noun may be understood and is, therefore, frequently © 
omitted: Μένων καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, Menon and those with 
him (his men); ot ὄπισθεν, chose in the rear; ot ἄνω oTpa- 
τιῶται, the soldiers who are above; οἱ viv, the men of the 
present generation. 


4- There is no indefinite article in Greek. The English 
a or aw must therefore usually be omitted in translation: 
πόλις, a czty. When the writer has in mind some particu- 
lar person or thing, but does not name it, the indefinite 
pronoun τὶς is used: ἀνήρ tis ταῦτα ἐποίησε, ὦ (certain) 
man did this. | 

τὶς is enclitic, and generally follows its noun. 


THE ACCUSATIVE 9 


_5. A predicate substantive with εἰμί and verbs signi- 
fying to Become, be Named, be Elected, be Thought, and 
Appear, is in the same case as the subject: αἱρεῖται otpa- 
τηγός. he ts elected general. [H.614: G. 907: B. 341, 1: Go. 534,4.] 


6. The Accusative joined with a verb, adjective, or 
substantive may denote that In Respect to Which the 
expression is used. This is called the Accusative of 
Specification: τά Te ἄλλα Κῦρος ἐτίμησέ pe, Cyrus hon- 
oved me in other respects; ὁ ποταμὸς ἦν Td εὖρος The- 
θριαῖος, the river was a plethrum in width. [H. 718: G. 1058: 
B. 337: Go. 537.] 


7. The Accusative may denote Extent of Time or 
Space: ἐνταῦθα ἔμειναν τρεῖς ὑμέρας, there they remained 
three days; ἐξήλαυνε παρασάγγην, ἦε marched a para- 
τρὶς ἢ [Η. 720: G. 1062: B. 338: Go. 538.] 


8. An Accusative is often used Adverbially : τέλος, 
finally ; τὸ λοιπόν, thenceforth; τὴν ταχίστην, by the 
quickest (road). [H. 719: 6. 1060: Β. 336: Go. 540.] 


9.) Two Accusatives, usually one of the Person, the 
other of the Thing, may follow verbs meaning to Ask, 
Demand, Remind, Teach, Clothe, Unclothe, Conceal, De- 
prive: Κῦρον δὲ τὰ πλοῖα αἰτήσω, 7 will ask Cyrus for 
the boats ; ἐβούλοντο ἀφαιρεῖσθαι τοὺς ἽἙλληνας τὴν γῆν, 
they wished to deprive the Greeks of their land. [Ἡ. 724: 
α. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535.] 


10. Verbs meaning to Do Anything To or Say Any- 
thing Of a person or thing may take two Accusatives: 
κακῶς αὐτοὺς ἐποίησε, he did harm to them (here κακῶς 
equals κακά, the second Accusative). [Η. 725, @: 6. 1073: B 
340: Go. 534, a.] 


ΙΟ GREEK PROSE .COMPOSITION — PART I 


11. The Accusative is used after the adverbs of swear- 
ing, νή and pa, dy. vy introduces an affirmative oath and 
μά a negative one: pa τοὺς θεούς, no, by the gods. - 

The student will notice that νή is opposite the meaning 
to our English zay. This will help him to distinguish the 
two words. [Η. 723: G. 1066-67: B. 344: Go. 532.] 


12. When the Vocative is used as the case of address, 
ὦ is often written before it. [H. 709: G. 1044: B. 327: Go. 61, a.] 

Article, H. 654-673: G. 941-981 : B. 444-458: Go. 549-556. Vom. 
and Voc., H. 706-709: G. 1043-1045: B. 325-327: Go. 503-504. Acc, 
H. 710-726: G, 1046-1082: B, 328-346: Go. 529-541. . 


13. TRANSLATE ὃ 


All the soldiers went back to their city. 5 «© 
You did this to a (certain) man. 5:8 1 
“T will remind the whole army of this,” said Cyrus. } 
This man was made general by the great king. = ~ 
Xenophon was general during the whole retreat (κατά- 
Baots). 3-4 
6. He remained in the middle of the city for three years. 
“Yes, by Zeus,” said he, “the man is brave.” 
8. Cyrus and his men are not braver than those in the 
van. 

9. The Greeks are asking Cyrus for a guide. 
10. That man was brave in battle, but in other matters a 
coward. 


Vey Se ree 


} 


4 


THE GENITIVE iI 


LESSON II 


THE GENITIVE CASE 


14. In its relation to another noun, the Genitive may > 
denote: 


1. Possession (Possessive Genitive): τὸ τοῦ πατρὸς 
πλοῖον, the father’s boat. 

2. The subject of an action or feeling (Subjective 
Genitive): ἣ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ εὔνοια, the good will of the 
general (i.e. which the general feels). 

3. The object of an action or feeling (Objective Geni- 
tive): ὁ τῶν βαρβάρων φόβος τῶν ᾿ Ελλήνων, the barba- 
vians fear of the Greeks (i.e. the Greeks were the object 
of their fear). 

4. Material or contents, including that of which any- 
thing consists (Genitive of Material): δύο χοίνικες ἀλφί- 
των, two quarts of meal. 

5. Measure of space, time, or value (Genitive of Meas- 
ure): ποδῶν πέντε ποταμός, a river of five feet (in depth). 

6. The whole after nouns denoting a part (Partitive 
Genitive): εἷς τούτων ἦν Ἕλλην, one of these was a Greek. 
[H. 729: G, 1085: B. 348-352: Go. 506.] 


45) The Genitive may be used as the object of a verb. 
This is often the case when the verb affects the object 
only in part. Such verbs are those that mean to Share, 
Enjoy, Hit, Miss, Aim, Begin, Lead, Rule, Take Hold 
of, Touch, Perceive, Hear, Taste, Smell, Remember, For- 
get: ἄρχειν τοῦ ἔργου, to begin the work; ἤκουσε θορύ- 
βου, ke heard a noise; τῆς βασιλείας μεταδώσω, J wll 


12 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


share the kingdom ; ἡγεῖτο τοῦ otpatetpatos, he led the 
army. — 

1., Verbs of hearing usually have the Thing Heard in 
the Accusative and the Person From Whom in the Geni- 
tive: ἤκουσε Τισσαφέρνους tov στόλον, he heard of the 
expedition from Tissaphernes. 

_2. The Genitive very often expresses the Part Taken 
Hold of : ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν Ὀρόνταν, they took hold of 
Orontas by the grrate. 

3. The verb ἄγω is an exception to the rule that verbs 


of leading and ruling take the Genitive. [H. 737-742: G. 1097, 
1099, 1102: B. 356: Go. 510, 511. ] 


16. The Genitive is also used with verbs denoting Sepa- 
ration, Comparison, Source. Such verbs are those that 
mean to Deprive, Remove, Spare, Release, Abandon, 
Differ, Surpass, Be Superior or Inferior to, Be Full of, 
Want: ἀσκῶν δισχιλίων δεήσομαι, J shall need two thou- 
sand skins; ἀπέχει τοῦ ποταμοῦ σταθμόν, ke is a day’s 
journey aistant from the river. 


Note. — What other construction may be used after a 


verb of depriving? ΓΗ. 743, 748, 749, 750: G. 1112, 1117, 1120, 
1130: B. 362, 364, 365: Go. 509.] 


17. The Genitive expresses the Cause, Crime, or Value. 


1. The Cause, after verbs of Praise, Pity, Anger, and 
Revenge: τῆς ἐλευθερίας ὑμᾶς εὐδαιμονίζω, 7] congratulate 
you on your freedom. ([H. 744: G. 1126: B. 366: Go. 509, ¢.] 

2. The Crime, after verbs of Accusing, Acquitting, Con- 
demning, and Convicting: διώκω σε ἀσεβείας, 7 prosecute 
you for tmpiety. [H. 745: G. 1121: B. 367: Go. 514.] 

3. The Value, after verbs of Buying, Selling, Valuing, 

c.: Spaxpis πρίασθαι, to buy for a drachme. [H. 746: G. 
1133: B. 353: Go. 513.] 


THE GENITIVE 13 


18. Many verbs compounded with a preposition take 
the Genitive when the preposition, used by itself in the 
same sense, would have that case. 

Especially many compounds of κατά which have the 
sense of feeling or acting against, take the Genitive of the 
Person: καταγελῶ ὑμῶν, 7 laugh at you. [H. 751-752: G 
1132: B. 370.] 

19. Many adjectives are followed by the Genitive. Such 
adjectives are generally kindred in meaning to verbs which 
take the Genitive. [H. 753: G. 1139-1140: B. 362, 2, 367: Go. 516.] 


20. The Genitive expresses the Time Within Which an 
action occurs: βασιλεὺς δέκα ἡμερῶν μαχεῖται, che hing 
well fight within ten days. [H. 759: G. 1136: B. 359: Go. 515.] 

21. Adjectives and adverbs of the comparative degree 
are followed by the Genitive when ἤ, ¢/an, is omitted. 
LH. 755: G. 1153: B. 363: Go. 517.] 

Gen., H. 727-761: G. 1083-1156: B. 347-372: Go. 505-518. 


. 22. TRANSLATE: 


For what (τί) does he need the whole army? 
They heard these things from the general’s daughter. 
For many days Clearchus led the army. 
They arrived at a river six feet. deep. 
He began his speech as follows: “1 will not take ven- 
geance on them for their evil deeds.” 
6. Nobody missed his man. 
7. In the night they had fear of the Greeks. 
8. Those men are more cowardly than these with us. 
9 
O 


(AY ρῶν om 


. He bought a chariot for twenty darics. 
. They overcame the enemy when they were! three 
stadia distant from the city. 


1 Use participle. 


14 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION—PART I 


LESSON III 


THE DATIVE CASE 


23. The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object of a 
transitive verb. This object is generally introduced in 
English by Zo: ἔδωκε τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἵππον, ke gave a horse to 
the man, or he gave the man a horse. ([H. 763-764: G. 1158: 
B. 375: Go. 520.] 

24. The Dative is used with many intransitive verbs 
(omit zo in translation) meaning to Benefit, Serve, Obey, 
Please, Profit, Trust, Aid, Befit, and their contraries; also 
with verbs denoting disposition toward any one, as Anger, 
Envy, Favor, Threats. 


ἐπίστευον αὐτῷ ai πόλεις, the cities trusted him. 
τῷ στρατηγῷ ἐπείθετο, Le obeyed his general. 
τῷ βασιλεῖ βοηθήσω, / well aid the king. 
I. ὠφελέω, 20 azd, takes the Accusative instead of the 
Dative. [H. 764, 2: G. 1160: Β. 376: Go. 520, a.] 


25. The Dative indicates the person or thing to whose 
Advantage or Disadvantage the action of the verb takes 
place. This Dative is sometimes translated like the Geni- 
tive of Possession. 


τοῖς νεανίσκοις évéxeav οἶνον, they poured in wine for the 
young uien. 

τὰ ὅπλα τοῖς στρατιώταις ἐπὶ ἁμαξῶν ἤγετο, the arms of 
the soldiers were carried on wagons (literally, the arms 
were carried for the soldiers, etc.). [H. 767: 6. 1165: B. 378: 
Go, 523. | 
26. The Dative with εἰμί, γίγνομαι, and similar verbs 

may denote the Possessor: ti ἔσται ἡμῖν, what shall we 


THE DATIVE 15 


have? The same idea could be expressed (though less 
commonly) by using ἔχω. [H. 768: G. 1173: B. 379: Go. 524, @.] 


27. Just as was the case with the Genitive, the Dative 
follows many adjectives and adverbs and some verbal sub- 
stantives kindred in meaning to the verbs which take the 
Dative of the indirect object or of advantage or disad- 
vantage. [H. 765: 6. 1174: Go. 522.] 


28. The Dative is used with words that imply Likeness 
or Unlikeness and Association or Opposition. Some com- 
mon verbs coming under this rule are πολεμέω, μάχομαι, 
and ὃ ἕπομαι. [H. 772-773: G. 1175: B. 392: Go. 525.] 


29. Many verbs compounded with ἐν, σύν, émi, and 
some with πρός, παρά, περί, ὑπό take the Dative: ἡμῖν 
ἐπιθήσονται, they will attack us. [H. 775: G. 1179: B. 394.] 


30. The Dative is used to denote Cause, Manner, and 
Means or Instrument; also the Degree of Difference after 
comparatives: προτέρα Κύρου πέντε ἡμέραις ἀφίκετο, she 
arrived five days before Cyrus (literally, before Cyrus by five 
days). [Η. 776, 781: G. 1181, 1184: B. 387-391: Go. 526.] 


31. The Dative denotes the Time When an action takes 
place: τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, on the next es [H. 782: G. 1192: B. 385: 
Go, 527, ¢.] 


I. χράομαι, Zo use, takes the Dative case (like wtor, 
which takes the Ablative). 


Caution. — Do not express Motion To or Towards by 
the Dative. Use a preposition and the Accusafive. 
Dative, H. 762-783: G. 1157-1198: B. 373-395: Go. 9=527- 


16 GREEK PROSE COMPOSILION — PART I 


32. TRANSLATE: 


I do not envy the king’s men. 

For seven days the soldiers followed him. 

I persuaded him to obey them. 

There Cyrus had a palace. 

This soldier always helped the king. 

He used the arrows which he had. 

On that day fear fell upon the Greeks. 

The mercenaries were very angry with Clearchus. 
A brave man will not fight with a friend. 

On the fourth day Tissaphernes attacked the Greeks. 


OD ON ANH WN "μι 


- = 
— 


LESSON IV 


PRONOUNS: DEMONSTRATIVE, INTERROGATIVE, INDEFINITE, 
RELATIVE 


33. 1. The ordinary demonstrative pronoun is οὗτος, 
this. Of the other demonstratives, ὅδε, z4zs (here), is used 
of something near or present; ἐκεῖνος, zat (yonder), of 
something remote. 

2. οὗτος is used in referring Jack to something already 
mentioned; ὅδε in referring forward to something about 
to be mentioned. 

3. There occur in Attic prose several compounds of 
οὗτος and ὅδε, as τοιοῦτος and τοιόσδε, svch, and τοσοῦτος 
and τοσόσδε, so much, so many. The student will notice 
that all pronouns compounded with τοι- or ot- denote 
Quality, and with too- or oo-, Quantity. 

4. Thus we generally find at the end of a speech such 
expressions as ἔλεξε ταῦτα (or τοιαῦτα) ; while before 


PRONOUNS 17 


the speech we find ἔλεξε τάδε (or τοιάδε). [H. 271, 272, 273: 
G, 409, 429: B. 480-482: Go. 205-212. | 


Caution. — Remember what was said in Lesson I, that 
demonstrative pronouns, when used with a noun, usually 
take the predicate position. 


34. 1. The principal interrogative pronoun is τίς, τίς, 
ti, who? which? what? This always has the acute 
accent on the first syllable. It is declined as follows: 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
ἽΜ. and F. N. M and F. N. 

Nom. tls τί τίνες τίνα 
Gen. τίνος, Tod τίνων 

Dat. τίνι, τῴ τίσι 

Acc. τίνα τί τίνας τίνα 

DUAL 
N.A V. τίνε 


G. and D. τίνοιν 


.2. The indefinite pronoun is τὶς, τὶς, τὶ, some, any. 
This pronoun is enclitic. It is declined just like the 
interrogative, except that the accent in declension is always 
on the ultima. 

3. The interrogative of Quality is ποῖος, troiad, ποῖον, of 
what sort? and of Quantity πόσος, πόση, πόσον, Low much ? 
[ H. 277-278: G. 415-416: B. 489-491, 151: Go, 217-222. ] 


35. 1. The relative pronouns are ὅς, ἥ, 6, who, which, 
that, what, and ὅστις, ἥτις, 6 τι, whoever, whichever, what- 
ever. The latter is called the indefinite relative. 

2. ὅστις is a compound of ὅς and tis, and both parts 
are declined together. The accent of ὅς is not affected 


by the presence of τὶς. 
GK. PROSE COMP.—2 


18 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


Mase. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. ὅστις ἥτις ὅ τι 
Gen. οὗτινος, ὅτου ἥστινος οὗτινος, ὅτου 
Dat. ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ ἥτινι ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ 
Acc. ὅντινα ἥντινα ὅ τι 
N.A.V. OTLVE ὥτινε ὥτινε 
G.and D. otvrivow οἶντινοιν οἵντινοιν 
Nom. οἵτινες αἵτινες ἅτινα 
Gen. ὧντινων, ὅτων ὧντινων ὧντινων, ὅτων 
Dat. οἷστισι, ὅτις ὀἘαἶἷστισι οἴστισι, ὅτοις 
Acc. οὕστινας ἄστινας ἅτινα 


3. The following relatives of Quality occur: οἷος and 
ὁποῖος, of which kind, (such) as; and of Quantity, ὅσος and 
ὁπόσος, how much, how many, (as much or as many) as. 
[H. 275, 280, 282: G. 421, 425, 429: B. 151: Go. 215, 222.] 


36. The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender, 
number, and person, but its case is determined by the 
construction of the clause in which it stands: ὁ ἵππος, 


ὃν εἶδε, καλὸς ἦν, the horse which he saw was beautiful. 
[H. 627: G. 1019: B. 462: Go. 613, a. ] 


37. The antecedent of the relative may be omitted, 
when it is implied in the context. Sometimes it is incor- 
porated into the relative clause. 


οὐκ ἀπεκρύπτετο ἣν εἶχε γνώμην, ke did not conceal the 
opinion which he had (i.e. Thy γνώμην ἣν εἶχε). 

ποιοῦσι ἃ βούλονται, they do what they wish (i.e. ταῦτα ἃ 
βούλονται). [H. 995-996: G. 1037, 1026: B, 461: Go. 613, ὦ, 614.] 


38. When a relative would naturally be in the Accusa- 
tive as the object of the action of a verb, it is generally 
assimilated to the case of its antecedent, if this is a Geni- 
tive or a Dative: ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας ἧς κέκτησθε (instead 


PRONOUNS 19 


“οἱ ἣν κέκτησθε), worthy of the freedom which you have 
acquired. [H.994: G. 1031: B. 465: Go. 613, 4] 


39. The indefinite relative, instead of the interrogative, 
is often used to introduce an indirect question: ἔλεγεν 6 τι 
ἔποίησε, Le told what he did. [H. 1011: G. 1013: B. 490: Go. 621.] 


40. The student should remember that a relative clause 
is very often expressed in Greek by the participle, with or 
without the article. 


τὴν πόλιν οὖσαν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ, the city which was in the 
plain (literally, detng in the plain). 

ὁ ταῦτα ποιήσας, he who has done this. 

τὰ γιγνόμενα, those things which are going on. 

τὰ γεγενημένα, those things which have happened. 


Caution. —In rendering expressions like these things 
which have happened, do not use ταῦτα for these things. 
The article alone with the participle is the Greek usage. 


41. TRANSLATE: 


1. Such words Tissaphernes spoke, but Xenophon replied 
as follows. 

2. They came to a certain river that was twenty feet wide. 

3. Ihe man who has planned these things is clever. 

4. ‘Who is this guide?” said Cyrus. 

5. That man is braver than the one who is present. 

6. We who are so brave (τοιοῦτοι) and so many are 
Greeks. 

7. He told us what Cyrus said. 

8. And with her he sent the soldiers whom Menon had. 

9. And they ask him how large the country is. 

o. What sort of a boy has he? 


20 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


LESSON V 


PRONOUNS: PERSONAL, DIRECT AND INDIRECT REFLEXIVES, 
POSSESSIVE, αὐτός 


42. The Nominative forms of the personal pronouns are 
omitted unless emphatic. If emphatic, they are expressed. 
[H. 677: G. 985: B. 467: Go. 557.] 


43. 1. A reflexive pronoun usually refers to the sub- 
ject of the sentence. When it refers to the subject of the 
clause in which it stands, it is called a direct reflexive. 

2. In a dependent clause, the reflexive pronoun often 
refers to the subject, not of the dependent, but of the 
principal verb. It is then called an indirect reflexive, and 
must be distinguished from the direct reflexive. 


γνῶθι σεαυτόν, kvow thyself. 

ἐβούλετο ἅπαν TO στράτευμα πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἔχειν τὴν γνώμην, 
he wished the whole army to be devoted to himself. (ἕαυ- 
Tov, an indirect reflexive, because it refers to the subject 
of ἐβούλετο, the principal verb.) [H. 683, 2: G. 993: B. 470, 
471: Go. 200.] 


44. The personal pronouns of the first and second per- 
sons are declined thus: ‘ 


First Person Second Person 
_ Nom. ἐγώ σύ 
Sinc. | Gen. ἐμοῦ, pod σοῦ 
Dat. ἐμοί, pol σοί. 
| Acc. ἐμέ, μέ σέ 
N.A.V. γώ σφώ ᾿ 


DUAL 
G.and Ὁ. νῴν σφῴν 


PRONOUNS 21 


First Person Second Person 
Nom. ἡμεῖς ὑμεῖς 
ΓΤ : | ie 
Pure. | Gen. mpav ὑμῶν 
Dat. ἡμῖν , ὑμῖν 
| Acc. ἡμᾶς ὑμᾶς 


45. There is no pronoun of the third person in regular 
use. In all cases but the Nominative αὐτός serves as the 
pronoun of the third person, 4zm, her, zt, them. When the 
pronoun of the third person is emphatic in the Nomina- 
tive case, some demonstrative is used. αὐτός is declined 
like ἀγαθός, except that it has αὐτό for αὐτόν in the Nomi- 
native and Accusative neut. sing. 


ΐ 


46. Αὐτός is used in three ways: 


1. Asa pronoun of the third person. 

2. As an intensive, meaning σεῦ, very (like 2256 in 
Latin): αὐτὸς ὁ ἀνήρ, the man himself. 

3. Preceded by the article, meaning the same (like tdem 
in Latin): ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ, the same man (τὰ αὐτά, the same 
things, is generally written ταὐτά; not to be confused 
with ταῦτα. ([H. 678-680: G. 989: B. 475: Go. 199.] 


47. The following is the declension of the reflexive 
pronouns: 


First Person Second Person Third Person 
Gen. ἐμαυτοῦ, -ἣς σεαυτοῦ, -ἧς ἑαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -οῦ, Or αὐτοῦ, etc. 
Dat. ἐμαντῴ, -ἢ σεαυτῴ, -ἢ ἑαντῴ, -ἢ, -ᾧ, OF αὐτῴ, etc. 
Acc. ἐμαυτόν, -ἦν σεαυτόν, -ἦν ἑαυτόν, -ἦν, -ό, Or αὐτόν, etc. 
Gen. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἑαυτῶν or σφῶν αὐτῶν 


Dat. ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, -ais ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς, -αἷς ἑαυτοῖς, -ais, or σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, -ats 
Acc. ἡμᾶς αὐτούς, -ἀς ὑμάς αὐτούς, -άς ἑαυτούς, -ds, -ά, or σφάς αὐτούς, -ds 


22 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


Nom. — σφεῖς 
Gen. ov σφῶν 
Dat. of σφίσι 
Acc. é σφᾶς 


ἐμαυτοῦ and σεαυτοῦ are used both as direct and indi- 
rect reflexives. 
od, ot, € is an indirect reflexive of the third person, but 
the forms οὗ and ἕ are not used in Attic Greek. 

ἑαυτοῦ, a direct reflexive, is used as an indirect reflexive 
in place of οὗ and ἕ. 


_ 48. The following forms of the personal pronouns are 
enclitic: pod, pol, μέ; σοῦ, σοί, σέ; οὗ, ol, ἕ. 

If the pronoun is emphatic, and in general after prepo- 
sitions, the enclitic forms of the pronoun retain their 
accent, and in the first person the longer forms ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, 
ἐμέ are then used. ΓΗ. 263: G. 986: B. 70: Go. 19.] 


49. 1. The possessive pronouns are formed from the 
personal pronouns. They are ἐμός, my, mine; ἡμέτερος, 
our; σός, your (sing.), ὑμέτερος, your (plur.). They are 
inflected like ἀγαθός, μακρός. | 

2. The possessive pronouns take the article whén a 
particular object is referred to: ἐμὸς φίλος, a friend of 
mine; ὃ ἐμὸς φίλος, my friend (the particular one). 
[H. 675: G. 946, 1: B. 476-478: Go. 204.] 


50. 1. There is.no possessive of the third person in 
Attic prose. The Genitive of αὐτός, in the predicate 
position, is used to express “zs, her, tts, their. 

2. Ina like manner the Genitives of the personal pro- 
noun (especially in the singular) are sometimes used in 
the predicate position, instead of the possessives ἐμός, ἡμέ- 
TEPOS, σός, ὑμέτερος. 


PRONOUNS 


23 


3. Genitives of the reflexive pronouns, when they ex- 
press possession, take the attribute position. 


ὁ ἐμὸς πτατήρ 

ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐμός 
πατὴρ ὁ ἐμός 

ὁ πατήρ μου | 


| my father. 


εἶδε τὸν πατέρα αὐτῶν, he saw their father. 
τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χειρί, weth his own hand. 


ΓΗ. 690, 689, 692, 3: G. 998, 2, 1002, 1003: B. 466-479 : Go. 194-204, 557-559. ] 


51. TABLE OF PERSONAL, REFLEXIVE, AND POSSESSIVE 


PRONOUNS 
Direct Indirect : 

Personal Reflexives Bithexives Possessives 
First ἐγώ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐμός (5ΪΠΡ.), ἡμέτερος 
Person (plur.), ov Gen. of 
personal in predi- 

cate position 
Second σύ σεαυτοῦ σεαυτοῦ σός (sing.), ὑμέτερος 
Person (plur.), ov Gen. of 
personal in predi- 

cate position 
Third |atrés in 41} ἑαυτοῦ (οὗ), of, (€), etc. |Use Gen. of αὐτός 
Person | cases but} or Forms in () not| in the predicate 

Nom. αὐτοῦ Attic. .Use ἑαυτοῦ) position 


Notre. — Remember that the article is often used where 
in English we use an unemphatic possessive pronoun 


(3, 1). 


Fy ““" 


24 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


52. TRANSLATE: 


That young man killed himself. 

You are a Greek, but I am a Persian. 

When he saw them, he laughed. 

They did not wish the enemy to see them. 

My brother sent off his own father. 

They fought with one another on that day. 

This soldier was a friend of mine. 

During the same day the Greeks themselves set out. 
We have been wronged by their king. 

Greeks, your general has done the same thing. 


Of. COON OV GS ee ae 


»- 


LESSON VI 
REVIEW 


53. Review carefully all of the principles given in 
1-51. 


54. Learn thoroughly the meaning of the following 
list of words, memorizing the principal parts of all the 
verbs: 


1. δέω, δέομαι] 5. αἰτέω 

2. ἀκούω 6. ἐρωτάω 
3. μιμνήσκω 2 7. ἀφαιρέω 
4. μένω 8. αἱρέω ὃ 


1 δέω, meaning to want, need, request, takes the Genitive. 

2 Notice the active and middle meaning. The Perfect middle is used with 
a present meaning, like memini in Latin. 

8 Act. seize, mid. choose. 


REVIEW 


κρύπτω 
ποιέω (κακῶς or εὖ) 


. ἀφικνέομαι 
. ἄρχω 


τιμωρέω 

ὠνέομαι 
ἀποδίδωμι (mid.) 
κρατέω 

τυγχάνω 


. ἀπέχω 


ἁμαρτάνω 
ἀπέρχομαι 


. ἔτος 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
20. 
30. 
3I. 
32. 


κατάβασις 
ἡγεμών 
ἔμπροσθεν 
ὄπισθεν 
βάθος 
θυγάτηρ 
πούς, ποδός 
λόγος 
πείθω (act. and mid.') 
ἕπομαι 
φθονέω 


57. γελάω 


45. 
46. 
47. 
48. 
49. 
50. 
ey, 
52. 
53. 
54. 
55. 
56. 


25. 


. χράομαι 


ὠφελέω, βοηθέω 


. ἐμπίπτω 


μάχομαι 
ἐπιτίθημι (mid. ) 
ὀργίζομαι 
τόξευμα 


. βασίλεια 
. ἐνταῦθα 
. ἀεί 


. φόβος 


μισθοφόρος 
εὖρος 

δεινός 

παῖς, παιδόϑ 
ἀποκρίνομαι 
βουλεύω 
βούλομαι 
πάρειμι 
ἀποκτείνω 
ὁράω 

πορεύω (mid.”) 
νεανίας 
ἀλλήλων 


55. From the above list of words, let the. instructor 
form sentences embodying the principles of the first five 


lessons. 


sight in the class-room. 


The student should write these sentences at 


1 Act. persuade (Accusative), mid. odey (Dative). 


2 Act. make go, mid. proceed. 


26 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


LESSON VII 


TENSES — EXHORTATIONS, COMMANDS, AND PROHIBITIONS 


56. Keep in mind the following points in regard to the 
use of the tenses in the Indicative mood: 


1. The Aorist is of very frequent occurrence. It is 
more often used for the English Perfect than the Perfect 
itself, and frequently takes the place of the Pluperfect. 
As distinguished from the Imperfect it expresses a Simple 
Past Occurrence: ἐποίησα, J did; while the Imperfect 
ἔποίουν denotes Repeated or Continued Past Action, / was 
doing or used to do. The Aorist is also often used to 
express the English Imperfect. 

Let the student acquire the habit of using the Aorist 
for the Perfect unless emphasis is put on the fact that 
the action is completed in present time. 

2. In general avoid the use of the Pluperfect. 

3. Remember that there are several Perfects with the 
force of Presents, and Pluperfects with the force of Imper- 
fects: μέμνημαι, / remember. 

4. The following is the division of tenses into Primary 
or Principal, and Secondary or Historical: 


PRIMARY (PRINCIPAL) SECONDARY (HISTORICAL) 
Present Imperfect 
Future Aorist 
Perfect ; Pluperfect 


Future Perfect 


[H. 824-850: G. 1249-1270: B. 519-538: Go. 453-470, 246.] 


TENSES — EXHORTATIONS 27 


57. 1. The distinctions of time which mark the tenses 
of the Indicative are not maintained in the Subjunctive and 
Imperative, and generally not in the Optative and Infinitive. 

2. In using all moods but the Indicative, the Time should 
be lost sight of and the student should consider only the 
Kind ot Action of the verb, i.e. whether the verb expresses 
a continuance of the action or a simple occurrence or the 
completion. The Present tense denotes an action as con- 
tinued or repeated; the Aorist as simply brought to pass, 
the Perfect as completed. 


ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιῇ (Present), 2. he shall do this (habitually), or 
if he shall be doing this. 
ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιήσῃ (Aorist) (simply), 2f he shall do this. 
[H. 851: 6. 1271-1276: B. 539: Go. 475.] 


598. The Present and the Aorist are the tenes com- 
monly used in the Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, 
Infinitive, and Participle. 

The Perfect is rare in the Subjunctive, and not common 
in the other moods. 

The Future Optative is used only in indirect discourse, 
and the Future Infinitive is generally used in that con- 
struction. . | 


59. The first person of the Subjunctive (generally 
plural) is used to express an Exhortation. The negative 
is PH: ἔλθωμεν, et us go; μὴ πολέμιοι γενώμεθα, et us 
not become enemies. [H. 866, 1: G. 1344: B. 585: Go. 472.] 


60. An exhortation in the third person is expressed by 
the third person of the Imperative mood: ἐλθέτω ἐπὶ τὴν 


πόλιν, let him come to the city; χαιρόντων, let him rejoice. 
[G. 1342: B. 582: Go. 484.] 


28 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


61. The second person of the Imperative is used to 
express a Command or Prohibition: τοῦτο ποίει, do this 
(command); μὴ τοῦτο ποίει, do not do this (prohibition). 


62. In negative commands (i.e. prohibitions) μή is used 
with the Present Imperative if the act is continued, but 
with the second person of the Aorist Subjunctive if the 
simple occurrence of the act is to be expressed. 


μὴ ποίει τοῦτο, do not do this (habitually), or do not go on 
doing this. 
.« μὴ ποιήσῃς τοῦτο, do not do this, referring to a single 
action. [H. 874, a: G. 1346: B. 584: Go. 485.] 


SUMMARY 
Let us come, ἔλθωμεν 
Come, ἔλθετε 
Let them come, ἐλθόντων 


Do not come (habitually), μὴ ἔρχεσθε 
Do not come (single act), μὴ ἔλθητε 


63. TRANSLATE: 


Let us see all the horses that you have. 

Fellow soldiers, do not be discouraged. 

Let the king be honored by his sailors. 

Do not throw your arrows against the enemy. 

Try to be braver than those who are in his house. 

Let us not proceed home (οἴκαδε), but let us use the 
provisions that we have. 

7. “Hear my words,” said Cyrus. 

8. Do not shut the door. 

9. Let us not do harm to our own country. 

0. Do not wonder at this. 


Sade iti el a i 


ego 


CAUSAL CLAUSES— ov μή 29 


é LESSON VIII 


CAUSAL CLAUSES—INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE—SUBJUNC- 
TIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE WITH οὐ μή 


64. Causal clauses state the cause of an action and are 
introduced by ὅτι, ws, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ὅτε and ὁπότε, because 
or stuce. They take the Indicative after both primary and 
secondary sentences: ἔλιπε Συέννεσις TA ἄκρα, ὅτι ἤκονε, 
Syennesis left the heights, because he heard; ταῖς ναυσὶ 
πολιορκεῖ Μίλητον, ὅτε Τισσαφέρνει φίλη ἐστίν, he besieges 
Miletus with the ships, since it ts friendly to Tissaphernes. 
[Η. 925: G. 1505: B. 598: Go. 629.] 


65. The first person of the Subjunctive is used in ques- 
tions of Appeal, where the speaker asks himself or another 
what he is to do. The negative is μή. In Attic Greek 
this Subjunctive is often introduced by βούλει or βούλεσθε: 
TOUT® ποιήσω, shall I do this? or βούλει τοῦτο ποιήσω, 
do you wish that I should do this? τί μὴ εἴπω, what shall 
7 not say? [H. 866, 3, ὁ: 6. 1358: B. 577: Go. 471.] 2 


66. The Subjunctive (usually the Aorist), and some- 
times the Future Indicative, with οὐ μή may have the 
force of an emphatic Future with οὐ : οὐ μή τοῦτο γένηται 
(sometimes οὐ μή τοῦτο γενήσεται), thzs will not happen, or 
this surely will not happen; οὐ μή ποθ᾽ ἁλῶ, J will never 
be caught. [H. 1032: G. 1360: B. 569, 2: Go. 489, a.] 


67. ao the Pantive: through. 


with the Accusative, oz account of. 


30 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION -- PART I 
| with the Genitive, wth. 
TO 
with the Accusative, after. 


| with the Genitive, concerning, about. 
πε 


with the Accusative, avound. 


68. SUMMARY 


Since he did this, ὑεῖ + τοῦτο ἐποίησε. 


ὅτε 
ὁπότε . 
What are we to do? τί ποιήσωμεν ; 


He will not do this| pot whe el ad ΒΟ ἢ; 
οὐ μὴ τοῦτο ποιήσει. 


σαυίίοη. ---1)0 not express questions like What shall 7 
do? or Where shall I go? where the speaker is in doubt, 
by the Future Indicative. The Subjunctive is generally 
used. : 


69. TRANSLATE: 


i. Inasmuch as we do not follow him, he is not our pay- 
master. | 
Where shall I see her? 
On account of this he found his friend. 
Hereafter! I will zot wait for them. . 
Shall I proceed with the army through the middle of 
the village? 


> 2 Ὁ 


1 Hereafter = after this. . 


WISHES 3 41 


6. Let us not go with the king. 
7. Will you reply,? or shall I speak ? 
8. Do not be cowards, simce the contest is about our 
lives? 
9. Do you wish, then,’ that I should stop ? 
10. What shall I give to each of my friends? 


LESSON IX 
WISHES — OUGHT AND MUST 


70. Wishes may be divided into two classes: 


1. Those that refer to the future; as may he do this, or 
O that he may come. 

2. Those that refer to present or past time, and that 
wish for something which (it is implied) is not or was 
not attained. They are commonly called Contrary to Fact 
wishes; as O that this had happened (implying that it did 
not biiwe), or would that he were not here (implying that 
he is here now). | 


71. 1. Wishes that refer to the future are expressed by 
the Optative, with or without εἴθε or εἰ yap. The nega- 
tive is μή. 

2. The Future and Perfect tenses of the Optative are 
not used in wishes. 


ὑμῖν δὲ τοῦτο ot θεοὶ δοῖεν, may the gods grant you thts. 
εἴθε μὴ γένοιτο, O that τὲ may not happen. ([H. 870: G. 1507: 
B. 587: Go. 476.] 


1 Does this come under the rule in 65? 2 σῶμα, -ατος, τό. ὃ οὖν. 


32 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


72. Contrary to fact wishes may be expressed in two 
ways: 


1. By the past tenses of the Indicative with εἴθε or εἰ 
yap. The Imperfect tense refers to present time, and the 
Aorist to past time. The Pluperfect is not commonly 
used. The negative is μή. 


εἴθε pe εἶδες, would that you had seen me (implying that he 
did not see me). 

εἰ γὰρ μὴ παρῆν, O that χε, were not present (implying that 
he is present). 


2. By ὥφελον, Aorist of ὀφείλω, with the Present or 
Aorist Infinitive, the Present Infinitive when the wish 
refers to present time, and the Aorist when it refers to 
past time. Negative py. The subject is Nominative, 
subject of ὥφελον, not Accusative, subject of the Infini- 
tive. ΄ 


ὥφελές με ἰδεῖν, would that you had seen me (literally, you 
ought to have seen me). 

ὥφελε μὴ παρεῖναι, O that he were not present (literally, he 
ought not to be present). [H.871,a: G. 1511, 1512: B, 588: Go. 470.] 


73. English expressions that employ the auxiliary verbs 
Ought or Must, such as you ought to go, he must do this, are 
expressed in Greek in several ways. The English construc- 
tion is generally personal, while the Greek phrase is gener- 
ally impersonal. 


74. The Greek constructions in common use are: 


1. δεῖ with the Accusative and Infinitive ought or 
χρή with the Accusative and Infinitive ) τη. 


OUGHT AND MUST ae. 


2. Verbal adjectives in Téos 
ἀνάγκη, with or without ἐστί, and the 
Accusative (sometimes Dative) and 
Infinitive 


> must. 


Examples :. 
τοῦτο αὐτῷ ποιητέον (ἐστί) 
ἀνάγκη (ἐστί) αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιῆσαι | 
δεῖ αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιῆσαι ; He ought to do this, or He 
χρὴ αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιῆσαι must do this. 


He must do this. 


75. The student will remember the following facts about 
the use of verbal adjectives in Téos: 


I. -τέος is added to that theme of the verb which is 
obtained by removing the augment and ending of the 
First Aorist passive. } 

2. The verbal, when used in the personal construction, 
is always passive in sense, and expresses Necessity. The 
agent is expressed by the Dative. 

3. The verbal, when used in the impersonal construction 
(and this is more common), is in the Nominative neuter 
‘singular (sometimes plural) with ἐστί expressed or under- 
stood. In this use it is practically active in sense and 
takes an object the same as its verb. The agent is 
expressed by the Dative. 

4. In using the verbal, always recast an active English 
sentence to its corresponding passive form, as we must do 
this to 12 must be done this by us, or this must be done by 
us before turning the sentence into Greek. 


πειστέον ἐστὶ τῷ στρατηγῷ ὑμῖν, you must obey your gen- 
eral (literally, 22 must be obeyed your general by you). 
[Η. 988-992: G. 1594-1597: B. 235, 663-666: Go. 352-354, 596. ] 
GK. PROSE COMP. — 3 


κ΄. πα δον GREEK PROSE CUMPOSILION — PART I 


Caution. —In using the impersonals Set and χρή, do 
not employ the Dative and the Infinitive after them; the 
Accusative and the Infinitive is the common Greek usage. 
This mistake is very natural, as the impersonal English 
form is 22 zs necessary for him, etc. | 


76. SUMMARY OF THE wssH CONSTRUCTIONS 


Present or Aorist Optative, with or with- 


1. Posszble. out εἴθε or εἰ γάρ. 


| Descent εἴθε or εἰ γάρ and Imperfect In- 
i oon ; 4 dicative, or ὥφελον and Pres- 
Negative pq. | II. Contrary ent Infinitive. 
to Fact. εἴθε or εἰ yap and Aorist Indic- 
Past ; Ὁ 
ἢ ative, or ὥφελον and Aorist 
Time. *,@ 
Infinitive. 


77. TRANSLATE: 


We must proceed for a day through the plain. 
May he never find his friends. | 
The man ought to obey his king. 
Would that Cyrus were not marching inland.! 
On the following day he said, “Ο that I had not fought 
the Greeks.” | 
6. Since Cyrus is our generM, we ought not to disobey 
him. | : 
7. The whole army must learn this. 
8. We must not await the enemy. 
9. Would that the king’s men? had not fled into the 
camp. 
10. May he not do harm to me. 


\ 


re ΨΥ ἐν ΝᾺ 


. 1 ἀναβαίνω. 2 the king’s men = the king and those with him. 


PURPOSE CLAUSES 35 


LESSON X 
PURPOSE AND OBJECT CLAUSES 


78. A Purpose clause is one which expresses the end 
or purpose of the action of a verb. 

In English, purpose is indicated in a variety of ways. 
In the sentence He came to see me, the purpose clause 
to see me may be expressed zu order that he might see 
me, or for the purpose of seeing me, or in order to see 
me, etc. 


79. The following are the common ways of expressing 
purpose in Greek:. | 


ἵνα, ὡς, ὅπως and the Subjunctive or Optative. 
The Infinitive. 

The Future Parti 
4. A relative with f 


[Η. 881, 951, 969, 5 911: G. 
653, 5: Go. 


Yap gat 


uture Indicative. 


Ἷ 69, 1532, 1442, 1563, 4: B. 590-592, 
5, 636, 638, 642. | 


80. In expressing purpost , ὡς, or ὅπως take the 
‘Subjunctive when the majn is a primary tense, and 
the Optative when the main veNS%Mis secondary. On the 
principle of indirect discourse the Subjunctive is often 


used after a secondary tense. The negative is μή. 


ἔρχεται ἵνα τοῦτο ἴδῃ, ke zs coming in order that he may 


see this. f, Γ 
ἦλθεν ἵνα τοῦτο ἴδοι, ke came that he might see this. Ἢ 


1 This word is used by Xenophon, but is not Attic Greek. Avoid its use, 


\ 


36 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


81. “Qs is often used with the Future Participle to express 
purpose, indicating the Presumed or Intended rather than 
the Real purpose. 


ἦλθεν ὡς διαλεξόμενός μοι, Le came (as though) Zo speak 
with me. [Η΄. 978: G. 1574: B. 656, 3: Go. 593, 4. 


82. The sentence He sent a man to see me might be 
expressed in Greek in the following ways: 


ἵνα ᾿ 
ἔπεμψεν ἄνδρα ὡς 
ὅπως 
ἵνα 
ἔπεμψεν ἄνδρα ὡς | με ἴδῃ. 
ὅπως 
ἔπεμψεν ἄνδρα ὀψόμενόν με. 
ἔπεμψεν ἄνδρα ὅς (or ὅστις) με ὄψεται. 
ἔπεμψεν ἄνδρα με ἰδεῖν. 


| με ἴδοι. 


83. After verbs which signify to Care for, Strive for, 
Effect, and Plan, the object of the action is expressed by 
ὅπως, that, and ὅπως μή, that not, with the Future Indicative, 
after both primary and secondary tenses. The Subjunctive 
and Optative also are used, but less frequently than the Fu- 
ture Indicative: émipedettar ὅπως μὴ γενήσεται, ke takes 
care that it may not happen; βουλεύεται ὅπως μήποτε ἔτι 
ἔσται ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῷ, Le plans how he may never again be in 
the power of his brother. [H. 885: G. 1372: B. 593: Go. 638, a.] 


- 84. Verbs and phrases which express or imply Fear, 
Caution, or Danger take μή, Zest or that, or μὴ οὐ, that not, © 
with the Subjunctive, if the main verb is primary, and with 
the Optative, if the main verb is secondary. The Subjunc- 
tive may be retained after a secondary tense: δέδοικα μὴ 


REVIEW 37 


γένηται, 7 fear that it may happen; ἔδεισα μὴ οὐ γένοιτο 
(or γένηται), 7 feared that τὲ would not happen. [H. 887: G. 
1378: B. 594: Go. 610, 611.] 


85. TRANSLATE: 


They asked Cyrus for boats, that they might sail away. 
They are afraid that the enemy will attack them. 
See to it that you are brave. 
He collected an ΠΟΥ as though to make war on the 
Thracians. 
5. O that he were present, that I might see him. 
6. He was on his guard lest the Greeks should attack him 
as he was going away. 
7. I am doing this that my friend may not suffer harm. 
8. He took care that the barbarian should never again 
capture him. 


Oe 


— 
~~ 


LESSON XI 
REVIEW 
. 86. Review all the principles stated in 56-84. 


87. ‘Learn’ thoroughly the meaning of the following 
words, memorizing the principal parts of all the verbs: 


I. ἀθυμέω 9. θύρα 

2. τιμάω 10. μισθοδότης 
3. ναύτης II. ὅπου 

4. βάλλω | 12. εὑρίσκω 

5. πειράω ᾿ 13. διά 

6. ἐπιτήδεια 14. μέσος 

7. κλείω 15. ἀγών 

8. θαυμάζω 16. σῶμα 


38 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


17. παύω (act. and mid.') 25. ἀποπλέω 

18. ἕκαστος 26. δέδοικα, ἔδεισα 

19. πεδίον 27. φοβέω (act. and mid.?) 
20. μετά 28. σκοπέω 

21. ἀναβαίνω 29. συλλέγω 

22. πυνθάνομαι, μανθάνω 30. φυλάττω (mid.) 

23. φεύγω 31. ἔπιμελέομαι 

24. στρατόπεδον 32. αἱρέω, ἁλίσκομαι 


88. Keep in mind the following facts in regard to the 
formation, conjugation, and accent of the Second Aorist 
tense system : 


1. In most Second Aorists the Indicative is conjugated 
like the Imperfect. The other moods are formed like the 
Present tense of those moods. 

2. The irrégularities in accent are: the Second Aorist 
active Infinitive and the Second Aorist middle Imperative 
circumflex the ultima; the Second Aorist active Participle 
and the five active Imperatives, εἰπέ, ἐλθέ, εὑρέ, λαβέ, ἰδέ, 
behold, have the acute on the ultima; the Second Aorist 
middle Infinitive of verbs in w has the acute on the penult. 

As an example, the complete synopsis of the Second 
Aorist system of λείπω is given. 


ACTIVE MIDDLE 
Ind. ἔλιπον | Ind. ἐλιπόμην 
Subj. λίπω 500]. λίπωμαι 
Opt. λίποιμι Opt. λιποίμην 
Imp. λίπε : Imp. λιυποῦ 
Inf. λιπεῖν ᾿ Inf. λιπέσθαι 
Part. λιπών Part. λιπόμενος 


1 In the active it means make stop, in the midile cease. 
2 In the active frighten, in the middle de afraid. 


CONDITIONS 39 


89. Several common verbs have Second Aorist systems 
formed and conjugated like those of μι verbs. A few of 
these synopses are given below, and should be thoroughly 
learned. 


ἁλίσκομαι, βαίνω, γιγνώσκω, 

be captured £0 know 
Ind. ἑάλων or ἥλων ἔβην ἔγνων 
Subj. ἁλῶ βῶ γνῶ 
Opt. ἁλοίην βαίην γνοίην 
Imp. βῆθι γνῶθι 
Inf. ἁλῶναι βῆναι γνῶναι 
Part. ἁλούς : Bas γνούς 


ΝΟΤΕ. --- ἔβην is conjugated like the First Aorist passive 
of a regular verb. ἑάλων and ἔγνων in the same way 
retain ὦ throughout. 


90. Write the synopses of all the Second Aorists in 87. 


91. Let the instructor form several original sentences 
in English from the words in 87, illustrating the gram- 
matical principles of 56-85. Let these sentences be 
given to the class to write at sight. 


LESSON ΧΙ 


PARTICULAR CONDITIONS: SIMPLE AND CONTRARY TO FACT 


92. There are two main classes of conditions, (1) those 
that refer to a single definite act, called Particular Condi- 
tions, and (2) those that refer to any one of a series of acts, 
called General Conditions. Example: Jf he does thts, he 
is punished, where the condition refers to single, specific 


40 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


occurrence. If this condition is put in the form /f he ever 
does this, he always ts punished, it becomes a general con- 
dition, because it refers to any one of a series of acts, and 
not to a specific one. 

A general condition, then, in English, may usually be 
recognized by the word ever, always, as often as. 


93. Particular Conditions are, for convenience, divided 
into four forms: 


Simple. 

Contrary to Fact (Non-Fact). 

More Vivid Future. 

Less Vivid Future (Vague Future). 


ΒΟ Ν " 


94. Simple Condition.— In this form the protasis (or 
condition) simply states a present or past supposition, and 
does not imply anything as to its fulfilment. The prota- 
sis has el, zf, with the present or past Indicative, and any 
form of the verb may stand in the apodosis (or conclusion). 


el ἔπραξε τοῦτο, καλῶς ἔσχεν, 27 he did this, it was well. 
GAN εἰ δοκεῖ, πλέωμεν, Gut 17 11 pleases you, let us sail. 
[H. 893: G. 1390: B. 602: Go. 647.] 


95. 1. Contrary to Fact Condition. — When the prota- 
sis states a present or past supposition, implying that the 
condition is not or was not fulfilled, the secondary tenses 
of the Indicative are used in both protasis and apodosis. 
The apodosis has the adverb ἄν. 

2. The Imperfect here refers to present time, and the 
Aorist to past time. The Pluperfect is not often used. 
The Imperfect may refer to an act as going on or repeated 
in past time. 


CONDITIONS 41 


.« καὶ ἂν ταῦτ᾽ ἐποίει, εἰ ἑώρα ἡμᾶς, and he would be doing 
this, if he saw us (implying that he did not see us). 

εἰ μὴ ταῦτα ἔπραξαν, οὐκ ἂν καλῶς ἔσχεν, 27. they had not 

done this, it would not have been well (implying that they 
did do this). 


The first example is in present time and employs the 
Imperfect, while the second is past time and employs 
the Aorist. [H. 895: G. 1397: B. 606: Go. 649.] 


96. In all conditions μή is the regular negative of the 
protasis, and ov of the apodosis. 


97. The student will notice that the only way of distin- 
guishing a past simple condition from a past contrary to 
fact is τῆς ἄν of the conclusion, as both may employ the 
Aorist Indicative in both parts. 


εἰ ταῦτα ἔπραξαν, καλῶς ἔσχεν, tf they did this, it was 
well (simple). 

el ταῦτα ἔπραξαν, καλῶς ἂν ἔσχεν, tf they had done this, 
tt would have been well (contrary to fact). 


Caution. — Observe how important the ἄν is; it may 
change the whole meaning of a sentence. 


98. TRANSLATE: 


I. If any one is brave, let us choose him general. 
2. If Cyrus had restrained himself, he would have been 
king. 
If he came, he marched through the city. 
4. If the general had wished to go, the soldiers would 
have followed him. 


ἮΝ 


42 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


5. If any one knows this, let him speak. 

6. He would persuade me, if my father were not here. 

7. If you had not come, we should now be proceeding 
against the king. 

8. Change 1 to a contrary to fact condition, past time, 
and write in Greek. 

9. Change 3 to a contrary to fact condition, past time, 
and write in Greek. 


LESSON XIII 


PARTICULAR CONDITIONS — VIVID AND LESS VIVID FUTURE 
99. Review 92 and 93. 


100. More Vivid Future Condition. — When a supposed 
future case is stated distinctly and vividly (as in English, 
if I shall go, or tf 1 go), the protasis has the Subjunctive 
with ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν, and the apodosis has the Future Indica- 
tive or some other form expressing future time. 

This form of condition, then, is recognized in English 
by the auxiliaries sha// and w//. 


ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃς, ἔσται σοι κακά, zf you will not come (or do 


not come), you will have trouble. [H. 898, 899: G. 1403, 1405: 
B. 604: Go. 650.] 


101. As a still more vivid form of expression, ei and the 
Future Indicative may be used in the protasis, instead of 
éav and the Subjunctive. 


Caution. — The auxiliary sha// or wz// is not necessary 
to express future time in English. In the clause zf he 


FUTURE CONDITIONS 43 


goes, the English Present may be used in the sense of we// 
go. Remember, then, that many vivid futures have sha// 
or τοῦδέ only in the conclusion. 3 


102. ’Eav (sometimes contracted to ἤν and Gv) is a com- 
pound of εἰ and ἄν. 


103 Less Vivid Future Conditions. —1. When a sup- 
posed future case is stated in a less distinct or vivid form 
(as in English, zf 7 should go), the protasis has the Opta- 
tive with εἰ, and the apodosis has the Optative with ἄν: 
εἰ πλούοϊος. γένοιο, τίνος ἂν δέοιο; 770 ye sheure be rich, 
what would you want ? ye KU 

2. The Future Optative is not used in ‘fine construction. 

3. This form of condition is recognized in English by 
the auxiliaries should or would in both parts of the condi- 
tion. [H. 900: G. 1408: B. 605: Go. 651.] 


104. In suppositions, especially less vivid future and 
contrary to fact conditions, the condition is often left to 
be understood, or is expressed by the participle. 


καὶ σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν av εἴην τίμιος, ὑμῶν δὲ ἔρημος av οὐκ av 
ἱκανὸς εἴην, and with you (i.e. if I should be with you) / 
should be in honor, but tf I should be (literally, dezng) 


deprived of you, L should not be able, etc. [H. 903, 969, d 
G. 1413: B. 614: Go. 583.] 


105. TRANSLATE: 
1. If we take this height, those above the road! will not 
be able to attack us. 
2. If he wz// come, what shall we do ?? 
1 οἱ ὑπὲρ τῆς ὁδοῦ. 
2 Is it correct to use the Future Indicative? “ 


44 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION— PART I 


3. Cyrus said, “If the king should fight within ten days, 
I would give you ten talents.” 

If he had come, we should have seen him. 

I should hesitate to embark in those boats. 

If this is so, I shall come. 

If I should not be captured by the enemy, I ΠΑΡ not 
be killed. 

If we should have! our arms, we would use our valor 
also.” 


ee ἫΝ 


99 


LESSON XIV 
GENERAL CONDITIONS 
106. Review 92 and 93. 


107. The distinction of conditions as particular and 
general is observed in all suppositions, but there is 
no difference in the Greek form of expression except in 
the first form, or simple conditions. Simple general con- 
ditions are of two forms, present and past, according to 
the time. | 


108. Present General Conditions. ‘These are general 
suppositions of present time implying nothing as to the 
fulfilment. They employ the Subjunctive with ἐάν, ἤν 
or ἄν in the protasis, and the Present Indicative (or some 
other present form denoting repetition) in the apodosis: 
ἐὰν κλέψῃ, ἁλίσκεται, 27) he ever steals, he is caught. ([H. 894, 
1: G, 1393, 1: B. 609: Go. 650. ] 

1 Use the participle. 
2 καί before the word it emphasizes, 


GENERAL CONDITIONS 45 


109. Past General Conditions. — These employ the Opta- 
tive with εἰ in the protasis, and the Imperfect Indicative 
(or some form denoting past repetition) in the apodosis: 


el κλέψαι, ἡλίσκετο, 77. he ever stole, he was caught. [H. 894, 
2: G. 1393, 2: B. 610: Go. 651, (2).] 


110. The Imperfect and Aorist Indicative are some- 
times used with dv to express a customary action. 

These forms, then, may be used in the conclusion of a 
past general condition. Do not confuse this use of Gv. 
with the Imperfect and the Aorist, with ἄν used in the 


conclusion of contrary to fact suppositions. [Η. 894, a: G. 
1296: B. 610, n. 1.] 


111. SUMMARY OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 


( a. Present time: ἐάν (qv, av) with Sub- 
junctive in protasis; Present In- 
dicative in apodosis. 

I. Simple. 1 6. Past time: et with Optative in prot- 
asis; Imperfect Indicative (or 


GENERAL | Imperfect with av, or Aorist with 
CONDITIONS. av) in apodosis. 


Il. Contrary to Fact. Same as Particular (95). 
Ill. More Vivid Future. Same as Particular (100). 


| IV. Less Vivid Future. Same as Particular (108). 


112. TRANSLATE: 


I. If he ever saw me, he ran away. 

2. If his soldiers should march in good order, he would ~ 
praise them. ! 

3. The enemy always escape, if we attack them. 


46 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


4. If you had ever come, he would have congratulated you. 

5. If we ever saw her, she was always speaking about her 
husband’s! bravery. 

6. The barbarians always tried to attack us, if we crossed 
the river. 

7. She used to march along with him. 

8. If he ever promises you, he will not deceive you. 

g. Cyrus is glad, if his soldiers never flee. 


LESSON XV . 


RELATIVE CONDITIONS 


113. A relative clause may have a conditional force, the 
relative pronoun or adverb implying the idea of 27, for 
example, whatever he does, I praise him means tf he does 
anything, I praise him; or, wherever he goes, I see him is 
equivalent to saying 27 he goes anywhere, I see him. | 

The relative word, when used with this conditional 
force, has an indefinite antecedent, that is, refers to an 
uncertain or undetermined person or thing, place or time. 
[H. 912: 6. 1426, 1427: B. 620: Go. 616.] 


114. 1. Conditional relative clauses have forms corre- 
sponding to the regular constructions used in conditional 
sentences, the only difference being that the relative word 
takes the place of εἰ, zf 

2. The ἄν of ἐάν is attached to the relative word, when- 
ever the Subjunctive is used; thus, ds ἄν, ὁπόθεν ἄν, etc. 


1 ἀνήρ. 


RELATIVE CONDITIONS 47 


With ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἔπεί, and ἐπειδή, ἄν is united and forms 
ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἔπήν or ἐπάν, and ἐπειδάν. The negative, 
of course, is py. Example: The sentence whomever he 
sees, I know is a relative clause with indefinite antecedent, 
and is a present general condition in form, therefore it is 
written in Greek just as a regular present general condi- 
tion would be, the relative and ἄν taking the place of ἐάν : 
ὅντινα ἂν ἴδῃ, γιγνώσκω. [H. 913: G. 1428, 1429: B. 621-625 : 
Go. 616, 617. ] 


115. The following summary will indicate the construc- 
tions used in all kinds of conditional relative sentences: 


c 


Particular: Relative and Indicative in protasis ; 


ἱ any form in apodosis. 
(a. Present: Relative + av and Sub- 
i Stat. junctive in protasis; Present 


Indicative in apodosis. 
ὦ. Past: Relative and Optative in 
protasis; Imperfect Indicative 
in apodosis. 


General. 6 


Relative and past tenses of Indi- 
cative in protasis ; av and past 
tenses of Indicative in apodo- 
sis. 


to and 


1 11. Contrary Both particular 
Fact. general. 


CONDITIONAL RELATIVE 
SENTENCES 


Vivid and in protasis ; Future Indicative 


Ill. More us particular | Relative + av and Subjunctive 
Future. general. in apodosis. 


Vivid and sis; ἄν and Optative in apod- 
Future. general. osis. 


M2": Bate Both particular Relative and Optative in prota- 


The above table is a summary of the moods and tenses 
used in all kinds of conditions. For all kinds of conditions, 
see H. 889-918: G. 1381-1437: B. 599-625: Go. 616, 617, 645-656. 


48 


GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


116. The following are some of the more important 
meanings of the preposition ἔπί with its different cases: 


> , 
€Trl ¢ 


F 


with the Genitive. 


with the Dative. 


with the Accusative. 


117. TRANSLATE: 


4 


4 


a. Of place, om or upon: ἐπὶ γῆς, on the 


earth ; ἐπὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου, on the left 
Wing. 


. With verbs of motion, towards, in the 


direction of : ἐπὶ "Iwvias, zz the di- 
rection of [onia. ἡ 


. In the time of: ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν, in our 


time. 


. Denoting distribution: ἐπὶ τεττάρων, 


four deep; ἐφ᾽ ἑνός, in single file. 


. Of place, at, by, near: ἐπὶ θαλάττῃ, 


at the sea. 


. In the power of: emi τῴ ἀδελφῴ, 771 


the power of his brother. 


. To, against (with verbs of motion): 


ἐπὶ βασιλέα, against the yvreat king. 


. On, upon (with verbs of motion): 


ἀναβαίνειν ἐφ᾽ ἵππον, fo mount on 
horseback. 


. Extending over (extent of space): ἐπὶ 


πολύ, for a great distance. 


1. Wherever Cyrus would go, his soldiers would follow. 
2. Whenever the Greeks came to a river, they were afraid 
that the enemy would attack them. 
3. I know whatever he does. 
4. She would have obeyed whatever he said. 
5. Whenever they were drawn up three deep, they never 


conquered. 


6. They will use whatever arrows they take. 
7. Whenever anyone wishes to go away, he permits him. 
8. Wherever he went, he was in the power of his father. 


REVIEW 


LESSON XVI 


REVIEW 


49 


118. Review the principles stated in 92-116. 


119. Learn thoroughly the meaning of the following 
words and memorize the principal parts of all the verbs: 


I. ἀνέχω (act. and mid.) Rs. 
2. γιγνώσκω. 14. 
3. alpéw 15. 
4. ἁλίσκομαι 16. 
5. ὐφαθομι 17. 
6. ἄκρον (plur.) γ΄ 18. 
7. τάλαντον {9 7 19. 
8. δίδωμι 20. 
9. dkvém! |Y Vg 
10. ἀρετή 22. 
11. ἐμβαίνω “΄ 25: 
I2. εὐτάκτως 24. 


25. ὑπισχνέομαι |/ 


ἐπαινέω Κ΄ 
ὅπου ’ 

ἐάω 
ἀποφεύγω Vv 
εὐδαιμονίζω 
διαβαίνω ,)΄ 
τάττω 

ντκάω ζ΄ 
ἡττάομαι 
ἐξαπατάω /- 
ἥδομαι 
ἀποδιδράσκω {,, 


120. Write out the synopsis of the second Aorist system 


of verbs in the above list. 


121. Let the instructor form several sentences employ- 
ing the words in 119 and embodying the most important 


of the grammatical principles in 92-116. 


These sentences 


should be written in Greek, at sight, by the class. 


1 Followed by the Infiritive, it means hesz/ate; by ph and the Subjunctive 


or Optative, fear. 
GK. PROSE COMP. — 4 


50 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


LESSON XVII 


BEFORE AND UNTIL 


122. Until in its meaning may refer to either definite or 
indefinite time: 1. If we say, / wazted until they arrived, 
7 did not go away until I had found tt, or, in general, when 
the reference is to a past action, we refer to a definite 
point of time. 2. If we say, 7 shall not go away until 7 
see him, 1 watted until he should find it, or, in general, 
when the reference is to future time, we have an indefi- 
nite point of time, because the speaker implies that he 
does not know when the decisive event will occur. — 

Unizl, then, refers to past or definite time, or to future 
or indefinite time. 


123. 1. Untzlis expressed in Greek by ἕως, ἔστε, ἄχρι, 
and μέχρι; πρίν also means wzz/z/, but only after a negative 
sentence. 7 

2. When μα refers to definite time, it takes the Indica- 
tive mood, usually the Aorist tense: ἔμεινα ἕως ἀφίκοντο, 
7 waited until they arrived. [H. 922: G. 1464: B. 619: Go, 631.] 


124. When μηρί refers to indefinite time, ἄν and the 
Subjunctive is used after a primary tense, and the Optative, 
without ἄν, after a secondary tense. The Aorist is the tense 
commonly used: μαχοῦμαι μέχρι dv τὴν πόλιν ἕλω, 7 “λα 
fight until I shall take the city; ἔμεινα ἕως ἔλθοι, 7 waited 
until he should come. [H. 921: G. 1465: B. 626: Go. 631.] 


125. IIpiv has two meanings. 


1. After affirmative sentences it is naturally translated — 
before ; as, He went away before it was light. | 


BEFORE AND UNTIL 51 


2. After a negative sentence it is more naturally ren- 
dered by wutil than before; as, He did not go away until 
2: was light. 


126. When πρίν means defore, that is, after an affirma- 
tive sentence, it takes the Infinitive with subject Accusa- 
tive: ταῦτα δ᾽ ἐποίησε πρὶν αὐτούς pe ἰδεῖν, Le did this 
before I saw them. [Η. 955: G. 1470: B. 645: Go. 644.1 


127. When πρίν means zziz/, it employs the same con- 


struction as ἕως, as explained in 123 and 124. [H. 924: G. 
1471, 2: B. 627: Go. 644.] 


128. The following table summarizes the moods and 
tenses used after πρίν and ἕως, ἔστε, ἄχρι, and μέχρι: 


‘ after Affirmative 
Sentences Infinitive. 
(meaning before). 


| I. Definite Time. Indicative. 


fa. After Primary 
after Negative tense, ἄν and | τ 


Sentences {1Π1|. Indefinite Subjunctive. ἰ “XP 
(meaning 27,2}. Time. 6. After Secondary μέχρι 
tense, Optative | “272. 
without av. i 


πριν - 


(The negative is μή in all constructions.) 
129. “Ews also means while, as long as, and in this sense 
takes the Indicative. 


General references, H. 920-924: G. 1463-1474: B. 619, 626, 627, 645: 
Go. 631, 644. 


130. TRANSLATE: 
1. Let the truce remain until he comes. 
2. He used to arm himself! carefully before he fought. 


1 What tense expresses used 20 ἢ 


52 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


3. She told the heralds to wait until she should be at leisure. 

4. Do not do this until I come. 

5. He did not set sail until he saw his mother. 

6. He delayed until his soldiers should march through the 
middle of the city. 

7. If we had not known this, we would not have waited 
until they arrived. 

8. As long as he saw her, he waited at the door. 

g. Let us proceed until we see him. 


> 
> 


LESSON XVIII 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE— SIMPLE SENTENCES 


131. The words or thoughts of any person may be quoted 
either directly or indirectly. A direct quotation (i.e. direct 
discourse) is one which gives the exact words or thoughts 
of the original speaker or writer. An indirect quotation 
(i.e. indirect discourse) is one in which the original words or 
thoughts are stated in the words of another and conform to 
the construction of the sentence in which they are quoted. 

The English sentence “I am present,’’ when quoted 
indirectly, is stated ‘‘ He says chat he is present,” or, when 
quoted after a past tense of the verb of saying, “ He said 
that he was present.” Indirect statement, then, is gener- 
ally introduced in English by the word that. 


132. An indirect statement in Greek may be introduced 
(1) by ὅτι or ὡς, corresponding to the English ‘¢hat; 
(2) sometimes by the Infinitive, without ὅτι or ὡς ; (3) some- 


times also by the participle, without ὅτι or ὧς. [H. 930: 6. 
1476: B. 670-673: Go.-659, 578, 586.] 


- 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE 53 


133. The following are the general principles of indirect 
discourse as applied to simple sentences when ὅτι and ὡς 
are used: 


1. After primary tenses, the verb retains both the mood 
and tense of the direct discourse, no change being made 
except (when necessary) in the person of the verb. 

Direct discourse: πάρειμι, 7 am present. 

Indirect discourse: λέγει ὅτι πάρεστιν, ke says that he 
ts present. [H.932, 1: G. 1481, 1: B. 672: Go. 624.] 

2. After secondary tenses, each Indicative and each 
Subjunctive of the direct discourse may be changed . to 
the same tense of the Optative, or retained in its original 
mood and tense. 


Exceptions. —(1) The Imperfect and Pluperfect, having 
no tenses in the Optative, are generally retained in the 
Indicative. (2) Secondary tenses of the Indicative with 
dv are not changed to the Optative. 

Direct discourse: ἔρχεται ἔπὶ τὴν πόλιν, he zs coming 
to the city. 

Indirect discourse: ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἔρχοιτο ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν, he 
said that he was coming to the city. 

Direct discourse: νῦν μὲν κα ἔρχονται πρόσθεν δὲ ἂν ἦλθον, 
they are coming now, and would have econ before. 

Indirect Discourse: ἔλεγον ὡς πῦν μὲν ρχοιντο (or ἔρχον- 
ται) πρόσθεν δὲ ἂν ἦλθον, they said that they were coming 
now, and would have come before. 


Notice that the tense of the verb never changes. 
[H. 932, 2, 933, 935: G. 1481, 2, 1482, 1493: B. 674, 675: Go. 659, 4.7 


134. In writing sentences in indirect discourse, let the 
student always think of what the direct discourse was, and 


54 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


then change that direct discourse according to the princi- 
ples stated in 138. 


135. The negative in indirect discourse is generally the 
same as it was in the direct discourse. [H. 1022: G. 1486: B.. 
670, 3: Go. 486. ] 

136. The student should notice carefully the difference 
between indirect statements and indirect questions. As 
has been stated before (131), indirect statements may be 
recognized by the fact that the word ¢at comes after the 
introductory verb. An indirect question, however, states 
indirectly a direct question, and has some interrogative 
word after the introductory verb instead of ¢haz. 


7 know who ts present (indirect question). 
7 know that he ts present (indirect statement). 
7 heard where he went (indirect question). 
7 heard that he went (indirect statement). 


137. After a primary tense, the verb of an indirect ques- 
tion remains in the same mood and tense that was used in 
the direct question ; after a secondary tense, it may remain 
the same, or change to the same tense of the Optative. 
[H. 930, 2: G. 1479: B. 673: Go. 661.] 

οἶδα ὁποῦ ἐστιν, 7 know where he is (the direct question 
being ποῦ ἐστιν); ἤκουσα ὁπόση ἡ χώρα εἴη, 7 heard how 
large the country was (the direct question being πόση 7 
χώρα ἐστίν). 


138. TRANSLATE: 
1. Tissaphernes reported that Cyrus was marching against 
the king. 
2. He said! that he would kill the horsemen who were 
burning? the country ahead. 
1 Do not use φημί. 2 Use participle. 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE 55 


3. They deliberated how! they should attack him. 

4. I knew that the king would not have done this. 

5. I say that Cyrus marched inland with a large army. 

6. He heard that the enemy would not fight for ten days. 
7. We asked him who this sailor was. 

8. They perceived that the enemy were in the camp. 


LESSON XIX 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE—INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE 


Review 132. 


139. 1. After verbs of Saying and Thinking, which 
introduce indirect discourse, the main verb is changed 
to the corresponding tense of the Infinitive, after both 
primary and secondary tenses. , 


Exception. — Of the common verbs meaning 20 say, εἶπον 
takes the ὅτι or ὡς construction with the Indicative or Opta- 
tive; λέγω, in the active voice, generally takes ὅτι or ὡς 
and the Indicative or Optative, and in the passive voice 


the Infinitive; φημί regularly takes the Infinitive. 


εἶπον and (generally) λέγω, therefore, are exceptions 
to 139. anit 

2. If ἄν was used in the direct discourse, it is regularly 
retained with the Infinitive in the indirect. 

Direct discourse: προσέρχεται, Le 2s approaching. 

Indirect discourse: φημὶ αὐτὸν προσέρχεσθαι, J say that 
he is approaching. [Η. 946: G. 1522, 1523: B. 669: Go, 658.] 


1 What was the direct form ? 


56 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION -- ΡΑΚΕῚ I 


140. When the subject of the Infinitive is the same as 


the subject of the introductory verb it is not expressed. 
[H. 940: 6. 895, 2: B. 646: Go. 571.] 


141. As an exception to the principle stated in 135, verbs 
of Hoping, Promising, and Swearing regularly have μή and 
the Infinitive instead of οὐ. [H. 1024: G. 1496: B. 549, 2: Go. 579, a.] 


142. After many verbs the participle may be used in 
indirect discourse, each tense representing the correspond- 
ing tense of the direct form. , The participle retains the 
av of the direct form. 

Such verbs are those that signify to See, Know, Hear, 
Learn, Perceive, Be Ignorant of, Remember, Forget, Show, 
Appear, Prove, Acknowledge, and ἀγγέλλω, to announce. 
To this class belong the phrases δῆλός εἰμι and φανερός 
εἰμι, φανερὸς γίγνομαι, used personally. 


Norte. --- Most of these verbs may also take the ὅτι or ὡς 
construction in indirect discourse. [H. 981,982: G. 1588, 1589: 
B. 661: Go. 586.] 

Direct discourse: προσέρχεται, Le 25 coming. 

Indirect discourse: ἀκούω αὐτὸν προσερχόμενον, 7 hear 
that he 1s coming. This may also be written ἀκούω ὅτι 
προσέρχεται. 

Direct discourse: παρῆσαν, they were present. 

Indirect discourse: ἔγνων αὐτοὺς παρόντας, or ἔγνων ὅτι 
παρῆσαν, / knew that they were present. 


143. The phrases δῆλός εἰμι, φανερός εἶμι, and φανερὸς 
γίγνομαι are used both personally and impersonally. When 
used personally (which is more common) the participle 
follows them; when used impersonally they take ὅτι or 
ὡς : Κῦρος δῆλος ἢν τοῦτο βουλόμενος, 27 was clear that 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE 57 


Cyrus wished this, or Cyrus evidently wished thts (literally, 
Cyrus was evident wishing this). 

The student will notice that the construction commonly 
used in English is impersonal. 


144. TRANSLATE: 


He announced that his own friends were approaching. 

On account of this he thought he would run off. 

It was evident that he had a large army. 

I saw that you were suffering harm, and were not able 
to retaliate. 

They swore that they would never fhe against their 
own friends. 

He said (ἔφη) that they never ἀδεάγεν their king. 

The king’s wife is said to have seen them. 

Cyrus was evidently 1 in Cilicia. 


S fy Ro 


oN Οἱ 


ee 


LESSON XX 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE—COMPLEX SENTENCES 


145. A complex sentence is one consisting of a principal 
clause and one or more dependent clauses; as “If he 
comes, 1 shall go”’; “‘ we waited until we saw her.” “The 
man whom I saw is a Greek.’’ The dependent verbs are 
italicized. 


146. When a complex sentence is indirectly quoted, its 
principal verb follows the rules stated in 133, 139, 141, and 
142. Its dependent verb follows the following law: 


1 What is the Greek idiom? 


58 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


After a primary tense, no change is made in the mood 
or tense of the dependent verb. After a secondary tense, 
no change may be made, or the dependent verb may 
change to the same tense of the Optative, except that 
dependent secondary tenses of the Indicative remain 
unchanged. When a Subjunctive becomes Optative, ἄν 
is dropped, ἐάν becoming el. 

Direct discourse: ὃς παρῆν, ἐμὸς φίλος ἦν, the man who 
was present was a friend of mine. 

Indirect discourse: ἔφη ὃς παρῆν φίλον εἶναι, he said 
that the man who was present was his friend. 

In this sentence παρῆῇν could not become Optative, 
because it is a secondary tense in the dependent clause. 

Direct discourse: ἐὰν ἔλθῃ, αὐτὸν ὄψομαι, 27) he comes, 7 
shall see him. 

Indirect discourse: εἶπον ὅτι, εἰ ἔλθοι, αὐτὸν ὀψοίμην, 
1 said that tf he should come, I should see him. Both ἔλθῃ 
and ὄψομαι might be unchanged. [H. 931, 932: G. 1497, 1, 2: 
B. 672-675: Go. 662. ] 

147. The principles stated in 146 apply also to any de- 
pendent clause after a secondary tense (even if the clause 
on which it depends is not quoted) that expresses indirectly 
the past thought of any speaker. [H. 937: G. 1502: B. 677.] 


148. The student will notice the difference between 
“know Z¢hat” and “know how 10. If that introduces the 
clause following vow, the construction is indirect dis- 
course, and the verb of knowing takes the participle or the 
ὅτι or ὡς construction. If ow fo follows the word kuow, - 
the construction is not indirect discourse. The Infinitive 
is then used. 

οἶδα αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιοῦντα, J know that he is doing this. 

οἶδα τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, / know how 20 do this. 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE 59 


γιγνώσκω, when followed by the Infinitive, often means 

judge, decide. ([H. 986: G. 1592, 2: B. 661, π. 3: Go. 588, ¢.] 

149. The student should remember the following facts 
about the use of conditions in indirect discourse. 


1. The protasis contains the dependent verb, and the 
apodosis the main verb. 

2. A contrary to fact condition never changes its mood 
and tense after ὅτι or ὧς, because it employs a secondary 
tense in the protasis, and a secondary tense with ἄν in 
the apodosis. 

3. The protasis of the vivid and less vivid future may 
be the same in indirect discourse; the apodosis, therefore, 
must be relied on to indicate the direct form of the condi- 
ery (2) εἶπεν ὅτι, εἰ ἔλθοι, ἀναβήσοιτο. 
(6) εἶπεν ὅτι, εἰ ἔλθοι, ἄν ἀναβαίη. 


Both are translated he σαϊαῖ that if he should come he 
would march inland, and it is, therefore, impossible from 
the English sentence to tell what the direct form was. In 
Greek, however, we can easily see that (a) was vivid future 
in direct discourse, because the Future Optative is used in 
the conclusion, and that (4) was less vivid because ἄν is 
used in the conclusion. 

150. In all indirect discourse sentences these three 
points should always be in mind: 

1. First find the direct form of the sentence. 

2. Remember that all changes are made to the Optative 
and not to the Subjunctive, as is the case with subordinate 
clauses in Latin. 

3. Do not change the tense. 


[Indirect discourse, H. 928-937, 946, 981, 982: G. 1475-1502, 1522, 1523, 
1588, 1589: B. 646, 661, 668-677: Go. 657-664. 


60 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


151. TRANSLATE: 


t. The sailor said that they would not set sail until the 
admiral arrived. 

2. He says (φησί) that if he had done this he would have’ 
been caught. 

3. He replied, “ Let us delay until we see them.” 

4. He promised that he would not give them up until they 
should make a treaty. 

5. They announced that they would follow him wherever 
he should lead. 

6. He does not know how to use his arms. 

7. He said that wherever the Greek went the enemy 
attacked them. 

8. He knew that they would dread to embark on the boats 
which Cyrus might give. 


LESSON XXI 


REVIEW 


152. Review the grammatical principles stated in 
122-151. 


153. The Eallanine synopsis of οἶδα should be learned. 
Review the conjugation of all its tenses. [491: 820.] 


Perf. οἶδα Opt. εἰδείην 
Plupf. ἤδη or ἤδειν Imp. ἴσθι 
Subj. εἰδῶ Inf. εἰδέναι 


Part. εἰδώς 


RESUL1' CLAUSES 61 


154. Learn the meaning of the following words. Mem- 
orize the principal parts of all the verbs, and write out a 
complete synopsis of the second aorist system of each verb 
that has one. 


1. ἐξοπλίζω «13. ἀντιποιέω 
2. σχολάζω 14. προδίδωμι 
3. ἀποπλέω 15. προσέρχομαι 
4. ϑιατρίβω 16. ὀκνέω 

5. σπένδω (mid.) 17. ἡἥγέομαι 

6. σπονδή (plur.) 18. ἀγγέλλω 
7. ἡγεμών IQ. κατακάω 
8. ἱππεύς 20. βουλεύομαι 
9. πῶς 21. αἰσθάνομαι 
10. ναύαρχος 22. ἀκούω. 
II. ὄμνυμι 23. μανθάνω 
12: πάσχω ᾿ 24. οἶδα 


155. Let the instructor form several sentences which 
employ the words in 154, and which embody the most im- 
portant of the grammatical principles in 122-151. These 
sentences should be written in Greek, at sight, by the 
class. β 


> 
«Ὁ. 


LESSON XXII 
THE INFINITIVE—RESULT CLAUSES 
156. Review 78 and 79, 2. 


157. The student should notice carefully the differ- 
ence between a Purpose and a Result clause. A result 
clause expresses the result or outcome of the action of 


62 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


a verb. Observe the difference as shown in these two 
examples: 


They shouted so that he might hear (Purpose). 
They shouted so that he heard (Result). 


Some word or phrase like so, such, in such a way, 
etc., is often used in the sentence before the result clause 
to lead up to it, and to show that such a clause is to 
follow. | 


158. Result is generally expressed in Greek by ὥστε 
(sometimes ὡς) with the Accusative and Infinitive (nega- 
tive μή), and the Indicative (negative ov). With the Infini- 
tive, ὥστε expresses the result which the action of the main 
verb tends to produce, and with the Indicative, the result 
actually produced. This distinction, however, which is 
hardly perceptible in English, is often disregarded in 
Greek : 


οὕτως ἐστὶ δεινὸς ὥστε δίκην μὴ διδόναι, Le 25 clever enough 
not to be punished. 

οὕτως ἐστὶ δεινὸς ὥστε δίκην οὐ δίδωσιν, Le zs so clever 
that he 1s not punished. 


[H. 953, 927: G. 1449, 1450: B. 595: Go. 566, 4, 639, a. | 


159. Result may be expressed by a relative pronoun 
with the Indicative. The negative is ob. This occurs 
chiefly after negative clauses, or interrogatives implying a 
negative : | 


τίς οὕτω μαίνεται ὅστις οὐ βούλεταί σοι φίλος εἶναι ; (Xen. 
Anab. II, 5, 12.) Whozws so mad that he does not wish 
to become your friend? [H. 910: G. 1447: B. 597: Go. 619.] 


THE INFINITIVE 63 


160. The Infinitive follows many adjectives that denote 
Ability, Fitness, Desert, Willingness. Some of the com- 
mon adjectives are δυνατός, able; δεινός, skzllful; ἄξιος, 
worthy ; ἱκανός, competent, able; ἕτοιμος, ready. 


ἀνὴρ τὰ μεγάλα πράττειν ἱκανός, a man capable of doing 
great things. [Η. 952: G. 1526: B. 641: Go. 565, a.] 


161. The Infinitive with the neuter article becomes a 
verbal noun, being used in most of the constructions be- 
longing to the different cases. This use of the Infinitive 
corresponds to the Gerund in Latin. 


LATIN 
Nom. τὸ μάχεσθαι or μάχεσθαι pugnare 
Gen. τοῦ μάχεσθαι pugnandi 
Dat. τῷ μάχεσθαι pugnando 


Acc. τό μάχεσθαι or μάχεσθαι pugnandum 


Here are a few examples of this use of the Infinitive: 


eis TO διώκειν ὡρμήσαμεν, we set out in pursutt. 

ἦρξαν τοῦ διαβαίνειν, they began the crossing. 

ἡ βασιλέως ἀρχὴ ἦν τῷ διεσπάσθαι τὰς δυνάμεις ἀσθενής, 
the country of the king was weak tn the scattered condition 

- of his forces. [H.959: 6. 1541-1547: B. 639-640: Go. 574-575.] 


162. After verbs and expressions denoting Hindrance 
or Freedom from anything, one may use (1) the simple 
Infinitive or (2) tod and the Infinitive. As the Infinitive 
after verbs implying negation may take μή to strengthen 
the previous negation without otherwise affecting the sense, 
one may use a third and fourth construction: (3) μή and 
the Infinitive and (4) Tod μή and the Infinitive. The Accu- 
sative τὸ μή and the Infinitive may also be used. 


64 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


εἶργεν αὐτοὺς μάχεσθαι 
εἶργεν αὐτοὺς τοῦ μάχεσθαι 
εἶργεν αὐτοὺς μὴ μάχεσθαι ; 
εἶργεν αὐτοὺς τοῦ μὴ μάχεσθαι 
εἶργεν αὐτοὺς τὸ μὴ μάχεσθαι 


He prevented them 
Srom fighting. 


[Η. 963: G. 1549: B. 643: Go. 572-573.] 
Infinitive, H. 938-964: G. 1516-1556: B. 632-647: Go. 562-579. 


163. TRANSLATE: 


1. Whenever he is skillful in speaking, I praise him. 

2. The barbarians will never hinder us from crossing the 
bridge. 

When he was a boy, he was worthy of being honored. 

They fought so bravely that they did not taste of food. 

He always prevented his men from capturing women. 

We went away in such a way as to frighten the citizens. 

Who would be so foolish as not to obey his general ? 

He accomplished this by being! brave. 

Therefore we have come to save you. _ 


ORE ae Oe 


“= 
~~ 


LESSON XXIII 


THE PARTICIPLE 


164. The Participle has three uses: 


1. It may qualify a noun, like an ordinary adjective. 
2. It may define the circumstances under which the 
action of the principal verb takes place. 


1 ἐκ rod and Infinitive. 


THE PARTICIPLE | 65 


. 3. It may be joined to a verb to supplement or com- 
plete its meaning, often having a force like that of the 
Infinitive. 


165. When the Participle qualifies a noun, lke an attrib- 
utive adjective, it may often be translated in English by 
a relative clause, especially when it is preceded by the 
article. 


τὸν βασιλεύοντα ἀδελφόν, Lis brother, who ἐς king. 
ἄνδρες of τοῦτο ποιήσοντες, men who will do this. See 40. 


166. In defining the circumstances of the action of the 
principal verb, the Participle may be translated in a variety 
of ways, according as it expresses Time, Cause, Manner, 
Means, Purpose, Condition, Concession, or Attendant Cir- 
cumstance. 

Time: ἀκούσας τοῦτο ἀπεκρίνατο, when he heard this,» 
he replied. 

Cause: ταῦτα ἐποίησε ἀπιέναι βουλόμενος, he did this 
because he wished to go away. 

Purpose: συλλαμβάνει Κῦρον as ἀποκτενῶν, he gee 
Cyrus as of to put him to death. See 79, 3. 

Condition: νικῶντες οὐδένα av κατακάνοιεν, zf they 
should conquer. (literally, conquering), they would kill 
nobody (the negative is μή). 

Concession: ταὐτὰ πεποιηκὼς οὐκ ἀπέθανε, although 


he had done the same things, he was not killed. [H. 969, a-e: 
G. 1563, 1-8: B. 653, 1-8: Go. 583. ] 


Remark. — In writing Greek let the student endeavor 
to use the Participle as much as possible, as participles 
are much more common in Greek than they are in 
English. ; 


GK. PROSE COMP. — 5 


66 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART I 


167. The supplementary participle completes the idea 
expressed by a verb, by stating that to which its action 
relates. In this use it is very often similar to the object 
Infinitive. It is often used in this sense with verbs that 
signify to Begin, Continue, Cease, be Weary, be Pleased, 
Displeased, or Ashamed. 


ἦρχον χαλεπαίνων, J was the first to be angry. 
παύσομαι λέγων, / well cease talking. 


[H. 980, 981: G. 1580: B. 660: Go. 585, 4.] 


168. When a circumstantial participle belongs to a 
substantive which has no grammatical connection with the 
main construction of the sentence, both the substantive 
and the participle are put in the Genitive. This is called 
the Genitive Absolute. | 

The Genitive Absolute may express any one of the ideas 
mentioned in 166. 


τῶν “EdAjvav ταῦτα ποιούντων, of βάρβαροι ἀπῆλθον, 
while the Greeks were doing this, the barbarians went 


off. 


The student will notice that the Genitive Absolute may 
be used in the above example, because the word Greeks 
has nothing to do, grammatically, with the main clause 
the barbarians went off. [H.970: G. 1568: B. 657: Go. 590.] 


169. The use of the Participle with the verbs λανθάνω, 
escape the notice of, τυγχάνω, happen, and φθάνω, anticipate, 
requires careful attention. 

The use of these verbs in Greek is very idiomatic and 
quite different from the English idiom. The translation 
will vary. The Participle generally contains the main 


THE PARTICIPLE 67 


idea of the sentence, while an adverb or a phrase will 
usually best translate the main verb of the Greek sen- 
tence. 


λανθάνω conveys the idea of unobserved, secretly, unseen, 
etc. 

τυγχάνω the idea of perchance, as 11 happened, as luck 
would have tt, etc. 

φθάνω the idea of first, beforehand, etc. 


Study these examples carefully : 


ἐτύγχανε παρών, as 221} happened he was present or he was 
present by chance (literally, he happened being present). 

ἐλάνθανεν ἀπιών, he went off without being seen, or he went 
off secretly (literally, he escaped notice going away). 

ἔφθασαν ἡμᾶς ταῦτα ποιοῦντες, they did this before we did 
(literally, they anticipated us in doing this). H. 984: Ὁ. 1586: 
B. 660, note: Go. 585, 4.} ν 


; ‘ 


170. TRANSLATE: 


If. we should cross the river, whom ἘΠΕῚ they kill ? 

2. I shall never cease to pity you and deem happy those 
who march with the king. ΐ 

3. Although he knows that the enemy are coming, he 
does not fear. 

4. He went secretly and took the height. 

5. He did this by chance, when Cyrus was speaking to 
his soldiers. 

6. When he had read the letter, he blamed him. 

7. ‘They arrived at the wall before the enemy. 

8. The king thinks that the Greeks are his, since he has 

them in his country. 
Participle, H. 965-987: G. 1557-1593: B. 648-662: Go. 580-595. 


— 


PARI «1! 


NOTES ON CONNECTIVES 


Compare the following examples of standard English 
and Greek prose, noticing especially the use of the con- 
nectives in the two languages: 


(From LINCOLN’s GETTYSBURG ADDRESS) 


“Fourscore and seven years ago our fathers brought 
forth upon this continent a new nation, conceived in lib- 
erty, and dedicated to the proposition that all men are 
created equal. Now we are engaged in a great civil war, 
testing whether that nation, or any nation so conceived 
and so dedicated, can long endure. We are met on a 
great battlefield of that war. We have come to dedicate 
a portion of that field as a final resting place for those who 
here gave their lives that that nation might live.” 


(THUCYDIDES, I, 46 ff.) 
ai μὲν δὴ νῆες ἀφικνοῦνται ἐς τὴν Κέρκυραν, οἱ δὲ Κορίνθιοι, 
ἐπειδὴ αὐτοῖς παρεσκεύαστο, ἔπλεον ἐπὶ τὴν Κέρκυραν ναυσὶ 
πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑκατόν. ἦσαν δὲ ᾿Ηλείων μὲν δέκα, Μεγα- 
ρέων δὲ δώδεκα καὶ Λευκαδίων δέκα, ᾿Αμπρακιωτῶν δὲ ἑπτὰ 
καὶ εἴκοσι καὶ ᾿Ανακτορίων μία, αὐτῶν δὲ Κορινθίων évevn- 
κοντα " στρατηγοὶ δὲ τούτων ἦσαν μὲν καὶ κατὰ πόλεις ἑκά- 


στων, Κορινθίων δὲ Ἐξνοκλείδης ὁ Εὐθυκλέους πέμπτος αὐτός. 
68 


NOTES ΟΝ CONNECTIVES 09 


The student will readily notice the difference in style in 
the two languages. Simple, vigorous English generally 
abounds in short, disconnected sentences.. The Greek 
language, however, marks very carefully the connection 
of sentences and clauses, and, by the free use of particles, 
indicates fine shades of contrast which can be expressed 
in English only by the stress of the voice. 

Remember, then, generally to begin each clause in 
Greek with a connective or particle, and to mark, by 
the use of the proper particle, the contrasted words or 
expressions. 

There follows a list of the common connectives and 
particles. In case of doubt as to the proper use of any 
one of them, consult a Greek-English lexicon to see the 
Greek usage. Those marked f cannot come first in the 
sentence. 


And: καί, δέ, rarely enclitic {τέ. 

Also, even: καί. 

But: ἀλλά, δέ (with or without a preceding {μέν). 

For: tyap (kal yap and ἀλλὰ yap are often found at the be- 
ginning of a sentence, where we usually say for and ὀρ. 

Therefore: tobv, Ἱτοίνυν, διὰ τοῦτο, τοιγάρ, τοιγαροῦν. 

However: Ἱμέντοι. 

Yet, nevertheless: ὅμως, καίτοι. 

At least, at any rate: enclitic γέ, γοῦν. γέ is often 
attached to pronouns: ἔγωγε. 

Of course, then: δή. This particle has a great variety 
of meanings according to the connection in which it is 
used. It often corresponds to of course, you know, you 
see, then, there, etc. Very frequently it gives strength 
or definiteness to another particle: ἔνθα δή, then indeed. 


7O GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


Not even: οὐδέ. 
And not: οὐδέ (when a negative clause precedes). 
Neither... nor: οὔτε... οὔτε. 


When μή is the proper negative, use it in place of οὐ in 
all compounds, as μήτε, etc. 

The use of μέν and δέ should be carefully noticed. They 
are used to contrast words and clauses whose contrast in 
English is often indicated merely by the stress of the 
voice, as πρεσβύτερος μὲν ᾿Αρταξέρξης, νεώτερος δὲ Κῦρος, 
“the older Artaxerxes, the younger Cyrus.” 

μέν does not connect its clause with what precedes, but 
looks forward, generally to a δέ which is to follow. 

kal yap often occurs at the beginning of a sentence, and 
implies that something is omitted which may be easily 
supplied from the context: ἔνθα δὴ ἐγιγνώσκετο ὅτι ὑπό- 
πέμπτος ein: καὶ γὰρ τῶν Τισσαφέρνους τις οἰκείων παρη- 
κολουθήκει πίστεως ἕνεκα, then indeed it became known that 
he had been sent underhandedly ; and (that was the case) 
for one of Tissaphernes relatives followed to ensure his 
fidelcty. 

In the expression ἀλλὰ yap something is easily inferred 
from the context between ἀλλά and γάρ. 


REMARKS ON TRANSLATION 


One may be able to translate correctly an English sen- 
tence, word for word, into Greek, and yet not be able to 
write real Greek. The Greeks had a natural way οἵ 
expressing their thoughts that is not like the English 
form of expression. The student in all of his study, then, 
should aim to understand this spzrit of the Greck language, 
else he will never be able to write real Greek. 


REMARKS ON TRANSLATION 71 


Take the English sentence “ He made this promise.” 
Translated, word for word, it would be ἐποίησε ταύτην 
τὴν ὑπόσχεσιν, but such a rendering would not be correct, 
for the Greeks would probably say, ταῦτα ὑπέσχετο, “he 
promised this.” The student will notice, therefore, that 
the English language uses a large number of abstract 
words whose thought would be rendered in Greek by 
verbs. In writing Greek always strive to remove from 
the English sentence its form of expression, and think 
only of the fact or idea that is being related; then trans- 
late that idea into Greek as simply as possible. 

Study the following examples: 7 


After the arrival of the generals, ἔπει οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἀφί- 
kovto. (Literally, “When the generals arrived.’’) 

I remembered her personal fee/ings, ἐμεμνήμην a αὐτὴ 
ἐβούλετο. (Literally, “1 remembered what she herself 
wished.”) 

They reported the details of the battle, ἤγγειλαν ὡς ἕκα- 
στα ἐν TH μάχῃ ἐγένετο. (Literally, “They reported 
how each thing took place in the battle.”) | 


EXERCISES BASED ΟΝ THE ANABASIS 


(“ Sec.” refers to the Section of the Chapter) 


BOOK I—CHAPTER I 
171. Sec. 1-2. | 


Darius happened! to send for Cyrus. 

Cyrus will collect all on the plain of Castolus. 
Therefore he wishes to march inland.? 
Tissaphernes, as it happens,? is not his friend. 


mae fees 


172. Sec. 3-5. 


1. They said that he was plotting * against the king. 

2. His mother does not wish Cyrus to be in the king’s 
power. 

3. He was arrested because he slandered® Tissaphernes. 

4. Cyrus planned so that his friends could wage war.® 


173. Sec. 6-7. 
1. He is making a levy in order to collect the very best 
men. 
2. The king gave to Tissaphernes all’ the cities, except 
Miletus. 


1 Use τυγχάνω: H. 984: G. 1586: B. 660, note: Go. 585, a. 2. march in- 
land: the Greek word means 29 go up. *as it happens. see 169. 4 he 
was plotting: the direct discourse was he ts plotting. Does the tense change ? 
5 because he slandered: use the participle. © so that... war. this is a 
result clause. H. 927: G. 1449-50: B. 595: Go. 566, ὁ, 639, a. 7H. 672: 
G. 979: B. 454, 455. 

72 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. II 73 


3. He became aware beforehand that Cyrus was collect- 
ing/ an army. 
4. He will kill those who plan? the same things. 


174. Sec. 8-9. 
1. Cyrus’ mother thought that the king did not perceive 
the plot. 
2. So that Cyrus waged war against Tissaphernes. 
3. Cyrus met the fugitive and gave? him this money. 


4. Another army will be secretly* supported among the 
Thracians. 


175. Sec. 10-11. 


1. Since Aristippus happened to be hard pressed, he 
asked Cyrus for gold.® 

2. He requested® his guest to overcome his opponents. 

3. He will not take the men until’ he wages war with 
them. 

4. The Pisidians will never trouble my land. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER II 
176. Sec. 1- 4. 


Clearchus resolved to take as large an army as he had. 
He promised us that he would not® stop until we? 
obeyed him. 


NO = 


1 that... collecting: H. 982: G. 1588: B. 661: Go. 586. 2 those who 
plan: use the article and the participle. See 40. ὃ. met and... gave= 
having met, gave. Use the Aorist participle. 4 Use λανθάνω. ° H. 724: 
G. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535. ὁ Study in the vocabulary the various uses of 
δέω, and notice that it governs the Genitive. 7 Use πρίν: H. 924: (Ὁ. 
1471, 2: B. 627: Go. 644. ®H. 1024: G. 1496: B. 549, 2: Go. 579, ἃ. 
The direct form was, 7 w7// not stop until you obey me. 


74 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


3. He arrives with the men from Miletus. 
4. Cyrus thought that he would proceed to the king! as 
quickly as he could. 


= 


177. “Sec. 5-8. 


1. Starting? from the city, he crossed this river. 
. Whenever we wish to hunt, we go into the park. 
3. Therefore he marched through the middle® of Phrygia 
five days’ journey. 
4. Xerxes was said to have been conquered * and to have 
retreated from Greece. 


178. Sec. 9-12. 


1. Cyrus remained for five days at a river which was® 
twenty feet ® wide.’ 

2. He is evidently troubled because ‘the men ask for 
pay. 

3. Cyrus paid a large amount of money to his army at 
that time. . : 

4. After he had made a review, a woman came. 


179. Sec. 13-17. 


— 
. 


The Cilician woman requested Cyrus? to review his army. 
Cyrus wishes each general to draw up his own men. 


~ 


1 fo the king: H. 722, a: G. 1220, 8: B. 418. 2 This use of the Present 
Participle in English must not be imitated in Greek; use the Aorist, because 
he started before he crossed the river. 8 Predicate position: H. 671: 6. 
978: B.454: Go.556. 420 have been conquered : use the participle. Where © 
English uses two coérdinate verbs with the same subject, Greek generally uses 
a participle and a verb. 5 which was. use the participle. 6 H. 729,d 
G. 1094, 5: B. 352. ἴπ ἐηξ width: the Accusative of specification. 8 δέω 
takes the Genitive. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. II 75 


3. He will review the Greeks in his chariot as they 
march by. 
4. There the Greeks halted’ and presented arms. 


180. Sec. 18-21. 


1. The Cilician woman was pleased when she saw the 
Greeks going to their tents. 

2. He handed her over to them to be sent? off by the 
quickest way.? 

3. On the next day a messenger said that Cyrus had 
killed a man. 

4. He perceives that they will go* upon the moun- 
tains. 


181. Sec. 22-27. 


1. When he had marched into this plain, he arrived at a 
city called Tarsus.® 
These said that they had perished because ® they could 
not find the road. 
He said that his wife wished to persuade‘ him. 
4. If we ever happen upon any gifts, we will® take 
them. | 


¥ 


a 


1 The verb is intransitive here. Consult the vocabulary and learn what 
forms of tornpe are transitive and what intransitive. 2 Does the Infinitive 
express purpose in Greek? in Latin? in English? *% An adverbial Accusa- 
tive. 4 that they will go: H. 982: G. 1588: B. 661: Go. 586. 5 called 
Tarsus: compare Κύδνος ὄνομα, sec. 23. 6 because... find. does the par- 
ticiple express cause ? 7 πείθω takes the accusative when it means fersuade 
and the Dative when it means obey. 8 Wherein is the difference in the Greek 
form of expression between a vivid future and a present general condition ? 


76 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 


182. Learn the meaning of the following words. They 
are all very important, and have occurred in Chapters I 
and II. Memorize the principal parts of the verbs, and, 
where indicated, notice the difference between the active 
and middle meanings. 


I. αἰσθάνομαι 18. δύναμις 35. παρασκευάζω 
2. ἀκούω 19. ἐλπίς 36. παύω (act. and 
3. ἀποδείκνυμι 20. ἐξέτασις mid.) 

4. ἀποκτείνω 21. ἐξελαύνω 37. πειράω 

5. ἀποδίδωμι 22. ἔρχομαι 38. πλήρης 

6. ἀπόλλυμι 23. εὐδαίμων 39. πορεύομαι 

7. ἀτιμάζω 24. ἡγέομαι 40. πούς 
᾿ 8, ἀφικνέομαι 25. ἵστημι 41. πρίν 

9. ἀναβαίνω 26. ἀφίστημι 42. τάττω 

10. διαβαίνω 27. καθίστημι 43. τελευτάω 
Il. καταβαίνω 28. κινδυνεύω 44. τελευτή 

12. βούλομαι 29. λανθάνω 45. τυγχάνω 

13. ἐθέλω 30. λείπω . 46. ὑπισχνέομαι 
14. βουλεύω 31. μένω 47. ὑποπτεύω 
15. ἐπιβουλεύω 32. νομίζω 48. χρῆμα 

16. γυνή 33. οὖν 49. ἀποχωρέω 
17. δύναμαι 34. παῖς 50. ἔπιχωρέω 


183. Review carefully the following points of syntax: 
1. The participle with τυγχάνω and λανθάνω. [H. 984: , 


G. 1586: B. 660, n.: Go. 585, @.] πὸ, εν; ὡς CAL τα ὡς 
2. The construction used after φημί, λέγω, and εἶπον. 
[H. 946, ὁ : G. 1523: Β, 669: Go. 658.] ἀρεϑπι ΕΣ 


3. The principle governing tenses in indirect discourse. 
[H. 932, 2: G. 1487, 1494: B. 670: Go. 659. ] 
4. ἔπί with the Dative. See any lexicon. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAPS. 1-} 77 


5. Various meanings of the participle. [H. 969: G. 1563: 
B. 653, 1-8: Go. 583. ] 

6. Result clauses. [H. 927, 910: G. 1449, 1450, 1445: B. 595, 
597: Go. 566, ὁ, 619, 639, a. ] 

7. OtTLor ὡς and the superlative. [H. 651: B. 428.] 

8. Purpose clauses. [Η. 881, 911, 951, 969, c: G. 136s, 1532, 
1442, 1563,4: B. 590-592, 653, 5: Go. 565, a, 615, 636, 638, 642.] 

9. Position of πᾶς, μέσος, and οὗτος. [H. 671, 672, 673: 
G. 974, 978, 979: B. 454, 456: Go. 455, 553-] 

10. Verbs that are followed by the participle in indirect 
discourse. [H. 981, 982: G. 1588: B. 661: Go. 586.] 

11. When αὐτός means the same. [H. 679: G. 989, 2: B. 
475: Go. 199.] 

12. Verbs that are followed by the Infinitive in indirect 
discourse. [H. 946: G. 1522: B. 669: Go. 658.] 

13. Case governed by πολεμέω and δέω. See lexicon. 

14. Verbs governing two Accusatives. [H. 724: G. 1069: - 
B. 340: Go. 534, 535-] 

15. Construction following πρίν, wztz/. [H.924: G. 1471, 
2: B. 627: Go. 644.] 

16. The negative used after verbs of Hoping, Promising, 
᾿ and Swearing. [H. 1024: G. 1496: B. 549, 2: Go. 579, a.] 

17. Duration of time. [H. 720: G. 1062: B. 338: Go. 538.] 

18. Genitive of measure. ([H. 729, 4: G. 1094, 5: B. 352: 
Go. 506. ] 

19. Present general conditions. [H. 894, 1: G. 1393, 1: B. 
609: Go. 650.] 

20. Vivid future conditions. [H. 898: G. 1403: B. 604: Go. 
650. | : 
21. δῆλός εἶμι used personally. [Η. 981: G. 1589: B. 634.] 

22. Accusative of specification. [H. 718: G. 1058: B. 337: 
Go. 537-] 

23. Verbs governing the Dative. [H. 764, 2: G. 1160: B. 
376: Go. 520, a. ] 


78 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


184. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 182 and involving the constructions in 
183. These sentences should be written by the students 
at sight. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER III 
185. Sec. 1-4. 


1. I suspect! that the Greeks are not hired for this. 

2.. He was surprised when he saw that his soldiers were 
stoning him.? 

3. Do ποῖ wonder, Cyrus, that I take the darics. 


4. 1 waged war against them that I might deprive the 
Greeks of their land.* 


186. Sec. 5-8. 


1. No one says that I betrayed Cyrus and chose ® the bar- 
barians. , 


I will suffer ® whatever I must do. : 

3. I think that’ if I should be deprived of you I should 
not be in honor. | 

4. Cyrus, because he is troubled,’ will send for Clearchus. 


~ 


187. Sec. 9-13. 


μ- 
. 


If we do not follow Cyrus, he will not be our paymaster. 
He feared that he would not inflict punishment? on them. 


τὸ 


115 fo suspect a verb of thinking? 2H. 683, a, 685: G. 993, 987: B. 
470, 471: Go. 200, 8 What is the difference between the use of μή with the 
Present Imperative and μή with the Aorist Subjunctive ? H. 874: G. 1346: 
B. 584: Go. 485. *H. 724: G. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535. ὅ detrayed and 
chose = having betrayed, chose. Which tense of the participle? °° H. 916: 
G. 1434: B. 620: Go. 616. 7 Which part of a condition is the main clause ? 
8 because he is troubled: use the participle. 9 énflict punishment: δίκην 
ἔπιτίθημι, with Dative. H. 887: G. 1378. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. IV 79 


3. We must consider?! how we shall be? valuable friends. 
4. When he had said this, he showed what the difficulty 
was.® 


188. Sec. 14-17. 


1. If he does not give us these, we shall send men to seize 

the heights. 
Let us take the property before * Cyrus does. 

3. I shall not obey whatever man you know. 

4. We should hesitate® to follow whatever guide you 
would wish to choose.® 

» 
189. Sec. 18--21. 


1. If we follow’ as friends, we shall not use the mercena- 
ries. 

2. I think it best to march inland with Cyrus. 

3. We replied that Abrocomas was® our enemy, and ὃ was 
distant from the river.? 

4. Cyrus promised that he would give each soldier a daric. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER IV 
190. Sec. 1-4. 


1. They march one day’s journey, amounting to six para- 
sangs, to the last city of Cilicia. 


1 must consider : use the verbal in réos. 2. how... be: H. 885: G. 1372: 
B. 593: Go. 638, a. ® What was the tense used in the direct question ? 
4 Use φθάνω. See H. 984: (Ὁ. 1586: B. 660, note: Go. 585, a2. ὃ Whatare 
the two meanings of oxvéw? See the vocabulary. ὃ How does aipéw differ 
in meaning in the active and middle voices? ἴ Zf we follow : does the parti- 
ciple ever take the place of the protasis ? H. 969,d: G. 1563, 5: B. 653, 6: 
Go. 583. 8 Omit. 5 Genitive of separation. 


80 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


2. He will command! them from Ephesus. 
3. He was said to be occupying these? walls. 
4. It was not possible® to pass through the middle of the 
road. 
191. Sec. 5-8. 


1.. We thought that Cyrus would send for the ships. - 

2. Cyrus remained there five days, and allowed them to 
sail off. 

3. Let him understand‘ that he will be caught. 

4. I know that he will rob them of their wives.5 


192. Sec. 9-12. 


They encamped at® a river which was thirty feet wide. 
Belesys, the former king‘ of Syria, had a palace. 

The soldiers said that they would follow Cyrus. 
Although he knew this, he marched inland with ὃ Cyrus. 


ΡΟΝ " 


“193. Sec. 13-15. 


1. They promised that they would follow Cyrus until he 
collected ® his army. 
2. He said this before they were persuaded. 
3. They ought? to cross the river. 
4. If we go away, he will use us for whatever he wishes. 


1H. 741: G. 1109: B. 356: Go. 510. ἄγω is an exception to this rule. 
2 Predicate position. 8 εἰμί in the third person singular often means ἐΖ 7s 
possible. 4 The third person of the Imperative is used in exhortations. In 
exhortations of the first person, the Subjunctive is used. ° H. 724: G. 1069: 
B. 340: Go. 535. ὃ Study all the meanings of ἐπί, as given in the vocabulary. ἢ 
1 the former king = the one having ruled : use the Aorist participle. ὃ H. 801, 
806: G. 1212, 1, ὦ, 1217. 9. The direct discourse was we will follow Cyrus 
until he collects. WH. 920-922: G. 1463-5: B. 626: Go. 631. 10 πρίν, 
meaning defore, takes the Infinitive. 11 ought is expressed by Set or χρή and 
the Accusative and Infinitive. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAPS. III-IV 81 


194. Sec. 16-19. 


We shall take care! that? you hear this. 

They prayed that the whole? army might follow thems 
He went ahead that.he might burn these boats. 

The villages in which they remained were full of food. 


ἐς ic abe Me a 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III AND IV 


195. Learn the meanings of the following important 
words which occur in Chapters III and IV. Memorize 
the principal parts of the verbs, and, where indicated, 
notice the difference between the active and middle mean- 
ings. 


I. ἀδικέω 17. ἔπιτίθημι 
2. ἄξιος 18. ἔπαινέω 
3. ἀποκρίνομαι 19. ἐπί 

4. ἀποπλέω 20. ἔπειτα 
5. ἀρετή 21. ἔρημος 
6. ἀσφαλής 22. εὔχομαι 
7. βάλλω 23. ἐχθρός 
8. γιγνώσκω 24. μέλω 
9. δέδοικα 25. μέντοι 
10. φοβέω (act. and mid.) 26. μήν 

II. ὀκνέω 27. οἶμαι 
12. διαβατός ᾿ 28. οἴχομαι 
13. διώκω 29. ὁρόω 
14. δέω (act. and mid } 30. ὁρμάω 
I5. ἕνεκα 31. ὁρμέω 
16. ἐντίθημι 32. πάσχω 


1 We shall take care = It will be a εαγὲ ἕο μηδ. 3 Ἡ. 885: G. 1372: B. 593: 
Go. 638,@. 3 Predicate position. 4 Refers to the subject of the verb prayed. 
GK, PROSE COMP.— 6 


82 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


33. πείθω 39. στενός 45. daive (act. and mid.) 
34. πιστός 40. τεῖχος 46. φανερός 

35. πρᾶγμα 41. τιμάω 47. φθάνω 

36. προδίδωηι . 42. προτιμάω 48. χράομαι 

37. σῖτος 43. τιμωρέω 49. Ψεύδω (act. and mid.) 
38. σκηνέω 44. ὑποψία 50. ὠφελέω 


196. Review 183 and the following points of syntax: 


I. Reflexive pronouns... [H. 683, 2, 685: G. 993, 987: B. 470, 
471: Go. 200.] 

2. Tenses in indirect discourse. [H. 853-855: G. 1483: B. 
670: Go. 659.] | 

3. Prohibitions. [Η. 874: G. 1346: B. 584: Go. 485.] 

4. Verbs taking two Accusatives. [H. 724: G. 1069: B. 
340: Go. 534, @ 535-] 

5. Vivid future relative conditions. [H. 916: G. 1434: B. 
621-625: Go. 616, 617.] 


6. Moods after verbs of Fearing. [H. 887: G. 1378: B. 594: 
Go. 610, 611.] | 

7. Construction used with φθάνω. [H. 984: G. 1586: B. 660, 
n.: Go. 585, α.} 

8. Use of the participle for the protasis of a condition. 
[H. 969, 4: G. 1563, 5: B. 653, 6: Go. 583.] 

9. The use of the third person of the Imperative. 

10. μετά with the Genitive. 

11. Until and before. Sec. 122-129. 

12. Ways of expressing ought. 

13. ὅπως and the Future Indicative. [H. 885: G. 1372: B. 
593: Go. 638, α.} 

14. Position of the demonstrative pronouns. [H. 673: G. 
974: B. 456: Go. 553.] 

197. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 195 and involving the constructions in 
196. These sentences should be written by the students. 
at sight. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. V 83 


BOOK I—CHAPTER V 


198. ee I-4. 


1. In this plain were sae of all kinds. 

2. Whenever they ran forward, the horsemen did the 
same.! 

3. It is possible to use the wings. 

4. Whenever the horsemen pursue? them, they quickly 
stop.® 


199. Sec. 5-8. 


1. All the inhabitants used to livet by making® millstones. 
. Since they could not buy grain, they ate flesh. 
3. On one occasion® Cyrus eee ntes that they worked 
slowly. 
4. Some, wearing’ tunics, ran into the mud. 


200. Sec. 9-1 Ἰ: 


1. Cyrus clearly® thought that he® would fight the king. 

2. One could see” that the kingdom was weak in its 
forces. 

3. They crossed the river in such a way that the water 
did not touch them. 

4. While Clearchus was inflicting * blows, the soldiers 
were angry. 


1 αὐτός following the article. 2 Whenever... pursue: a present general 
condition. ὅ How does παύω differ in meaning in the active and middle 
voices? 4 used to live: what tense denotes customary action? ® Use the 
participle. 95. Om ome occasion: use ποτέ. ἴἔχω & H. 981: G. 1589: 
B. 634. ® The subject of the Infinitive in indirect discourse is omitted when 
it is the same as that of the main verb. 10 One could see = /twas possible to 
see. llinsuchaway... touch: aresult clause. 12 while... inflicting : 
use the Genitive absolute. | 


~ 


84 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


201. Sec. 12-17. 


1. On the same day one of the soldiers came to split! 
~ wood. 
2. The Thracians were? thoroughly frightened, and ran to 
their own army. 
3. Proxenus chanced to speak lightly of their? suffering. 
4. Consider that the barbarians will be more hostile to us 
than the enemy are. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER VI 
202. Sec. 1-4. 


1. He said that if* he should seize the horsemen he 
would plot against Cyrus. 

2. We prevented them from seeing ® the king. 

They thought that a trusty man had this letter. 

4. Cyrus arrested® Orontas and called together the Per- 
sians. 


v9 


203. Sec. 5-7. 


1. It is right to council with you about Orontas. 

2. Afterwards I brought’ it about that he gave me pledges. 
3. Did® you not come to the altar and acknowledge 
this ? 

4. I said that they repented.® 


1 Review all the ways of expressing purpose. 2 were thoroughly frightened 
and ran= being thoroughly frightened, ran. ὃ αὐτῶν in the predicate 
position. A possessive Genitive of a reflexive pronoun takes the attributive 
position. 477... Cyrus. first write out the condition as it was in direct dis- 
course. ὅ from seeing: for the various forms of expression, see H. 963: ἃ. 
1549: B. 643: Go. 572,573. 5 arrested and called = having arrested, called : 
use the Aorist participle. 70, ἐποίησα ὥστε δόξαι. 8 H. 1015: G. 1603: B. 
572: Go. 668. 95 μεταμέλει is an impersonal verb, and takes the Dative case. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAPS. V-VI 85 


204. Sec. 8-11. 


1. If I should not do wrong, you would not be a friend to 


me. 


2. I have leisure to benefit! my friends. 


ὟΣ 


At the command of? Cyrus, they led him to death. 


4. They conjectured? that he had died. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS V AND VI 


205. Learn the meaning of the following important 
words which occur in Chapters V and VI. Memorize the 
principal parts of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice 
the difference between the active and middle meanings. 


1 Use ed ποιέω with the Accusative. 
ciple. Is the Genitive absolute permissible? 


ΘῸ MN AUAWDN = 


ἀποθνήσκω 


ἄρχω 
ἀσθενής 
εἰσάγω 
ἐξάγω 
γίγνομαι 
γνώμη 
διά 
διατρίβω 
ἐσθίω 
ἕτοιμος 


. εὐθύς 
. Caw 


ἡδύς 
θηρίον 
θηρεύω 


30. 
a5 
32. 


type (act. and mid.) 
ἱππεύς 
ἰσχυρῶς 
κατακαίνω 
κάω 
κατακάω 
προκατακάω 
κραυγή 
κρίνω 
κωλύω 

νοῦς 
ὀργίζομαι 
οὖν 
παντοῖος 
πλῆθος 

εὖ ποιέω 


2 At the command of. use the parti- 


8 This is a verb of thinking. 


86 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


33. κακῶς ποιέω 42. τρέχω 
34. ποτέ 43. προτρέχω 
35. πράττω 44. ὕδωρ 

36. πρόειμι 45. ὕστερος 
37. πυνθάνομα 46. φράζω 
38. σχολή 47. χείρ 

39. σχολαῖος 48. χρήσιμος 
40. σχολαίως ὶ 49. ὠνέομαι 
41. ταχύ 50. ὠφέλιμος 


206. Review the following points of syntax: 


1. Present and past general conditions. ([H. 894, 914, B.: 
G. 1393, I, 2, 1431, I, 2: B. 609, 610: Go. 650, 651, (2).] 

2. Verbs which take the participle in indirect discourse. 
[H. 981, 982: G. 1588: B. 661: Go. 586.] 

3. Result clauses. [H. 927: G. 1449, 1450: B. 595, 597: Go. 566, 
ὦ, 619, 639, a. | 

4. Genitive absolute. [H. 970: G. 1568: B. 657: Go. 590.] 

5. Construction after verbs of Preventing. [Η. 963: G. 
1549: B. 643: Go. 572, 573.] 

6. Interrogative particles. [H. 1015: G. 1603: B. 572: Go. 668.] 


207. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 205 and involving the constructions in 
206. These sentences should be written by the students 
at sight. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER VII 
208. Sec. 1-4. 


1. On the following dawn, the king came to fight. 
2. He planned how he would encourage! his men. 


lhow... encourage: the direct question was how can I encourage? 
[H. 872: G. 1327: B. 577: Go. 471.] 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. VII 87 


3. See to it that! you are braver than the barbarians. 
4. I will make many choose? not to go home. 


209. Sec. 5-0. 


Some say that you do this because you are? in danger. 

I say that you can not* pay all® you wish. 

3. I fear that he will not give® a golden crown to each 
man. 

4. What shall we have, if we go away? 


WN . 


210. Sec. 10-15. 


The number was said to be one hundred thousand.’ 
They arrived seven days after the battle.® 

Deserters before the battle were captured by the enemy.?® 
We thought that the king would fight at the walls. 


pe rat YES et 


211. Sec. 16-20. 


Cyrus learned that the king was marching forward and 
was inside the ditches. : 

2. If the king does not fight within ten days," I will give 
you the money. 

They promised that they would not” do this. 

Cyrus thought 18 he would sit in his chariot. 


1 See to it that: H. 886: G. 1352-3: B. 583, ἢ. 3: Go. 638, 4. 2 make 
many choose: cf, πολλοὺς ποιήσειν. .. ἑλέσθαι. 8 because you are: διὰ 
τὸ εἶναι. ‘that you can not: φημί is followed by the Accusative and 
Infinitive; εἶπον, and λέγω in the Active, by the ὅτι or ὡς construction. 
δὅσα. 6 that... give: H. 887: G. 1378: B. 594: Go. 610.611. 7 What 
is used in the text? S8seven... battle: cf. ὑστέρησε τῆς μάχης ὑμέραις 
πέντε. H. 781: G. 1184: B. 388: Go. 526. 9 dy the enemy. Genitive with 
ὑπό. 10 ἐπί: see the vocabulary for the proper case. 1! within ten days: 
the Genitive expresses the time Within Which; the Dative, the time When; 
and the Accusative, the time How Long. 12. 1024: G. 1496: B. 549, 2: 
Go. 579, a. 18 δοκέω with the Dative. : 


— 
. 


Poe 


88 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


BOOK I—CHAPTER VIII 
212. Sec. 1-7. 


1. He intended to halt, when a man appeared,! riding at 
full speed. 

2. They thought that the king would attack them.? 

3. After him, Proxenos occupied the left wing. 

4. All Spa a Cyrus did not have bare heads. 


213. Sec. 8-12. 


And then the whole army came into view. 

In the afternoon, the enemy appeared. 

They cut down whomever they came upon.’ 

Cyrus was deceived, however, in what* he told the 
Greeks. 


Pree). eet 


214. Sec. 13-17. 


1. Although he saw® that the king ἘΣ Ὁ the center, 
he did not do this. 
I will take care® that we are not surrounded. 
We asked him if the omens were favorable.‘ 
4. When he heard® the watchword passing through the 
ranks, he said, ‘“‘ Well,® let it be this.” 


oe 


215. Sec. 18-22. 
1. Everybody shouted, so as to frighten 19 the horses. 


1 Note the difference of meaning in the active and middle. 2 An indirect 
reflexive. H. 683, a, 685: G. 993, 987: B. 472: Go. 200. *® whomever... 
upon. past general condition. For the case, see H. 775: G. 1179: B. 394. 
4 Accusative of specification. ὅ Although he saw: the participle may denote 
concession. 6 J will take care = tt will be a care to me. ‘The direct 
question was Are the omens favorable? *®H. 742: G. 1102: Β, 356: Go. 
“510,511. *%GAAG. 1° ποιέω φόβον and Dative. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAPS. VII-VIII 89 


2. Whenever the chariots rushed through the Greeks, no 
one suffered any harm.? 
3. Cyrus knew that the Greeks were? victorious over those 
| opposite them. 
4. They thought they ὃ would perceive this. 


216. Sec. 23-29. 


1. Cyrus feared that the barbarians would march to meet 


him.* 

2. When he saw the king, Cyrus could not restrain him- 
self. 

3. Ktesias, the surgeon, will tell you how many® were 
killed.® 


4. He is said to have fallen from his horse. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS VII AND VIII 


217. Learn the meaning of the following important words 
which occur in Chapters VII and VIII. Memorize the prin- 
cipal parts of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the 
difference between the active and middle meanings. 


I. αἰσχύνω (act. and mid.) 7. βάθος 
2. ἀντίος 8. βαθύς 
3. ἀποθνήσκω : 9. βοάω 
4. ἅρμα 10. δόρυ 

5. αὐτομολέω II. ἐγγύς 
6. αὐτόμολος 12. ἔθνος 


lany harm: οὐδέν. Do two negatives in Greek make an affirmative ἢ 
2 H. 981, 982: G. 1588: B. 661: Go. 586. % May this be omitted? 4% 
meet him: ἀντίος. how many: ὁπόσοι. 65 ἀποθνήσκω is often used as 
the passive of ἀποκτείνω. 


90 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


13. ἕκαστος 26. θέω 38. ὄπισθεν 
14. ἑκατέρωθεν 27. θόρυβος 39. παίω 

15. ἑκατέρωσε 28. ἱκανός 40. πάροδος 
16. ἑκάτερος 29. καταφανής 41. περιπίπτω 
17. ἐλευθερία 30. κεφαλή 42. πίπτω 
18. ἔμπροσθεν 31. κρατέω 43. πλήν 

19. ἐντυγχάνω 32. κτάομαι 44. σπουδή 
20. ἐἔπιπίπτω 33. μιμνήσκω (act. 45. τάξις 

21. ἐρωτάω and mid.) 46. τάφρος 
22. ἔτι 34. νικάω 47. τόξευμα 
23. εὖρος 35. οἴκαδε 48. τοξεύω 
24. ἥκω 36. οἴκοι 49. ὑποζύγιον 
25. ἡνίκα 37. ὅμως 50. χρήζω 


218. Review the following points of syntax: 

1. Potential Optative. [H. 872: 6. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480.] 

2. ὅπως with the Future Indicative in Commands. [H. 
886: G. 1352-1353: B. 583, n. 3: Go. 638, 4.] 

3. Construction after φημί, εἶπον, and λέγω. [H. 946, ὁ: 
G, 1523: B. 669: Go. 658.] 

4. Construction after verbs of Fearing. [H. 887: G. 1378: 
B. 594: Go. 610, 611.] 

5. ὑπό and the Genitive [Η. 808, 1, δ: G. 1219, 4.] 

6. How is time Within Which expressed ? time When ? 
time How Long? [Η. 759, 782, 720: G. 1136, 1192, 1062: B. 338, 
359, 385: Go. 538, 515, 527, ¢] | 

7. What verbs take μή and the Infinitive? [H. 1024: G. 
1496: B. 549, 2: Go. 579, a.] 

8. Indirect reflexives. -[H. 683, 2, 685: G. 993, 987: B. 472: 
Go. 200. ] 

9. Compound verbs which take the Dative. [H. 775: 6. 
1179: B. 394.] 

10. The Accusative of specification. [H. 718: G. 1058: B. 
337: Go. 537-] 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. IX OI 


11. Various meanings of the participle. [H. 969, a-e: G. 
1563, 1-8: B. 653, 1-8: Go. 583.] 

12. Verbs followed by the Genitive. [H. 742: G. 1102: B. 
356: Go. 510, 511.] 

13. Indirect Questions. [H. 932, 1 and 2: G. 1479, 1481: B. 
673: Go. 661.] 


219. Let the instructor form several sentences, em- 
ploying the words in 217 and involving the construc- 
tions in 218. These sentences should be written by 
the students at sight. : 


BOOK I—CHAPTER IX 
220. Sec. 1-6. 


1. Cyrus was acknowledged to be worthy? to rule. 

2. When he was a boy, he was the best of all in every 
respect.? 

3. One? could learn * how to rule and to be ruled. 

4. Once a bear rushed upon Cyrus and dragged him off 
his horse. | 


221. Sec. 7-13. 


1. If he ever promised ὅ anybody ὁ anything, he considered 
it of the greatest importance’ not to prove false. 

2. Therefore all the cities feared Tissaphernes and chose 
Cyrus. 


1H. 952: G. 1526: B. 641: Go. 565, a. 2 Accusative of specification. 
8 τὶς, 4 could learn: H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480. μανθάνω followed 
by the participle means 7 /earn thai, etc.; by the Infinitive, 7 earn how to, 
etc. ®5Jf... promised: this is a past general condition. Review 106-111, 
113-115. 6 Dative of indirect object. 7 considered... importance: περὶ 
πλεῖστου ποιέω. , 


92 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


3. He prayed to live? until he should overcome the men 
who did him harm. 
4. He allowed rascals? to be deprived of their hands. 


222. Sec. 14-19. 


1. Brave men, however,’ he used to honor. 

2. Wherever‘ any one thought Cyrus would notice him, 
he evidently ὅ wished to incur danger. 

3. He employed ® just generals. 

4. If he ever saw that a man was just, he gave him more. 


223. Sec. 20-26. 


1. Cyrus thought that his friends needed? as® many things 
as they saw. 

2. They say that many sent® him gifts. 

He used to surpass his friends in thoughtfulness. 

4. The bearer said that Cyrus wished” you to take a 
taste" of these. 


224. Sec. 27-31. 


Ἦν 


1. He procured fodder on account οἵ having™ many 
friends. | 

2. If many were ever? likely to see him, he honored his 
friends. 


3. Cyrus thought that this man was faithful to him.“ 
4. After his death,” Ariaeus fled. 


1 See 122, 123,124. 2 κακοῦργοςς ὃ. γὲ μέντοι. 4 ὅπου. This is a past 
general condition. ὅ Use δῆλος or φανερός εἰμι ; H. 981: G. 1589: B. 634. 
6 χράομαι. What case follows it? 7 δέομαι takes the Genitive. 8 ὧς many 
as: ὅσος. In all indirect discourse constructions be sure to find the tense 
of the direct statement. Here the direct form was many sent. 1 The direct 
form was wishes. 11 take a taste: Aorist. Mon... having: διὰ τό and In- 
finitive. 13 H. 846: 6. 1254: B. 533: Go. 570, ὁ. 1, This refers to Cyrus. 
What kind of a reflexive pronounisit? 18 After his death: Genitive absolute. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. Χ 93 


BOOK I—CHAPTER X 


225. Sec. 1-6. 


1. The king with his men fled through his own! camp. 
2. The king pursued them as if he was victorious in every 
way. 
3. Tissaphernes planned whether he should go? ahead in 
pursuit or collect his own men. 
4. He was evidently making preparations. 


226. Sec. 7-12. 
1. The Greeks struck Tissaphernes’ men as they charged 
_ through. 
Ζ, The king is afraid that the Greeks will put® the river 
in their rear. 4 
3. The king then ® also® saw that the Greeks were chang- 
ing into the same formation. 
4. So that the Greeks did not know what would take place.’ 


227. Sec. 13-109. 


1. He halted® his army and saw that they were fleeing. 

2. He rode ahead to seize? some point.” 

3. They prepared this wine that they might distribute it 
among their friends. 

4. It was night before the king appeared.” 


1 his own ; the possessive Genitive of the reflexive pronouns is put regularly 
in the attribute position. 2 whither ...go.: the direct question was a dubitative 
Subjunctive, Shall I go? that... put: H. 887: G. 1378: B. 594: Go. 610, 
611. 4 put... rear: cf. ποιήσασθαι ὄπισθεν τὸν ποταμόν. ὅ δή. 6 καί 
placed before the word it emphasizes. 7 what... place: what tense of the 
participle? ὃ Consult the lexicon to see what forms of ἴστημι are transitive 
and what intransitive. % 0 se¢ze.: how many ways are there of expressing this 
idea? “some point: τὶ Dative. 13 πρίν, meaning defore, takes the In- 
finitive. See 125, 126, 127. 


94 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION --ξΡΑΚΤ II 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS IX AND X 


228. Learn the following important words which occur 
in Chapters IX and X. Memorize the principal parts 
of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
between the active and middle meanings. - 


I. αἱρέω (act. and mid.) 26. φιλοκερδέω 
2. αἰσχρός τευ, Adhos 

3. ἄριστον 28. οἴχομαι. 
4. ἀνάριστος 29. ὁμολογέω 
5. ἀναπαύω (act. and mid.) 30. ὀφθαλμός 
6. αὖθις 31. παῖς 

7. βασιλικός 32. παιδεύω 
8. βούλομαι 33. πεῖρα ~ 
9. ἐθέλω 34. πειράω 
LO. γεύω (act. and mid.) 35. πλουτέω 
II. διαδίδωμι 36. πλούσιος 
12. δέχομαι 37. πλησίος. 
13. δηλόω 38. ποτός ᾿ 
14. δοῦλος 39. πολλάκις 
15. ἔνθα 40. προχωρέω 
16. ἔπειτα 41. πρέσβυς 
17. εὔνους 42. σκοπέω 
18. εὔχομαι 43. σπένδω (act. and mid.) 
19. εὐχή 44. σπονδή 
20. ἤδη 45. στέρομαι 
21. θεάομαι 46. συντίθημι 
22. κατακόπτω 47. σάζω 

23. κρίνω 48. σφόδρα 
24. κέρδος 49. ὑπηρετέω 
25. Kepdahéos 50. ὑπηρέτης 


ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. I 95 


229. Review the following points of syntax: 


1. Infinitive with adjectives. [H.952: G. 1526: B. 641: Go. 
- 565, a.] | 
2. Present and past general conditions. See 106-111. 
Until and before. See 122-129. 
δῆλός εἰμι and φανερός εἰμι. [H. 981: G. 1589: B. 634.] 
What case follows δέω ἢ 
. Use of the tenses in indirect discourse. [H. 853-855: 
G. 1483: B. 670: Go. 659.] 

7. Use of μέλλω. [H. 846: G. 1254: B. 533: Go. 570, ὁ. 

8. Construction after verbs of Fearing. [H. 887: G. 1378: 
B. 594: Go. 610, 611.] 


Awe δ 


230. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 228 and involving the constructions in 229. 
These sentences should be written by the students at sight. 


BOOK II—CHAPTER I 
231. Sec. 1-4. 


1. At daybreak they decided to pack up and join? Cyrus. 
2. I will wait for you a day,” if you intend to come. 

3. Would that Cyrus had not died.® 

4. If he had* come, we would have put him on the throne. 


232. Sec. 5-0. 


1. We provided food as best we could® by using the oxen. 

2. One of them, as it happened, was acquainted with 
tactics.® 

1 to pack up and join = having packed up, to join. * What kind of time is 

expressed ? 8. Would... died: express this sentence in two ways. H. 870, 


871,a@: G. 1507, 1511, 1512: B. 588: Go. 470. 4 H. 895: G. 1397: B. 606: 
Go. 649. as best we could: cf. ὅπως ἐδύνατο (6). ὃ Cf. τῶν ἀμφὶ τάξεις. 


96 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


3. They bade him surrender his arms and go to the =e S 
court.! 
4. It is not the privilege of the conquered? to reply. 


233. Sec. 10-13. 


1. Why must’ the king persuade us and not come and 
take our arms? 
2. I think that you are mine,* berause I have a multitude 
of men. 
Do not think,® soldiers, that we shall not use our valor. 
4. Let them know,® however, that we are not foolish. 


Ww 


234. Sec. 14-18. 


1. Some said that they had been and would be? valuable® 
friends. 

2. He asked if you were® a Greek. 

Advise us what you think 19 will bring you honor. 

4. He will not surrender his arms, in order that! you may 
be more hopeful. 


Ὁ» 


295. Sec. 19-23. 


μι 
. 


If you could be saved by fighting 15 the etl I should 
advise you not to surrender your arms. 

We shall be more valuable friends, if we have® our 
arms. 


N 


1Use θύρα. 2 1... conquered = it ts of the conquered. * See 73 and 74. 
4 Use the possessive Genitive. 8 H. 874, a: G. 1346: B. 584: Go. 485. 
6 Let them know: in exhortations of the third person, the Imperative is used; 
of the first person, the Subjunctive. 7 had been and would be’: the direct dis- 
course was have been and will be,etc. ὃ πολλοῦ ἄξιοι. 9 What was the direct 
question? 10 what you think: 6 τι σοι δοκεῖ. 1 Review all the common 
ways of expressing purpose. See 78 and 79. 13 Use the participle. if we 
have. the participle is often used to express the protasis of a condition. 


ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. II 97 


3. Carry back word, therefore, that we must wage! war. 
4. Phalinus replies, ‘‘If you remain,? there will be a truce; 
and if you advance or retreat, war.” 


og BOOK II— CHAPTER II 
236. Sec. I-4. 


1. Ariaeus then ® said, “There are many Persians nobler | 
than I am.” 5 

2. If you do not® come, we shall go away early. 

3. At sunset they would not be able to cross the Tigris 
river without boats. 

4. Whenever the signal is given,® follow me. 


237. Sec. 5-10. 


1. They obeyed him, because the others were inexpe- 
rienced.’ 

2. About midnight, they grounded arms® and came ἴο- 
gether. 

3. The barbarians swore that they would ποῖ betray the 
Greeks. 

4. Come now,” let us take the same! journey. 


238. Sec. II-I5. 


1. If you go away by the road 12 by which you came, you 
will perish from hunger. 


1 that... wage: H. 981: G. 1588: B. 235, 663-666: Go. 352-354, 596. 
2 7 you remain: notice carefully the expression used in the text. 8 δή. 
4Omit. 8 H. ΙΟΙ9, 1021: G. 1383, 1: B. 600: Go. 646. 6 Whenever... 
given . what kind of a condition? — signal ἐς given : use σημαίνω impersonally. 
' because... inexperienced: use the Genitive absolute or a conjunction, such 
as ὅτε or ἐπεί, and the Indicative. 8. ground arms: τίθημι τὰ ὅπλα. 9 See 
141. 10 Come now: ἄγετε δή. 1! What position has αὐτός when it means Zhe 
same? lbythe...came, cf. ἣν ἤλθομεν, H. 715, ὁ: G. 1057: B. 331: Go. 536. 

GK. PROSE COMP. — 7 


98 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


2. You must! proceed through the country. 

3. If we are once separated from the Persians, they will 
not? be able to overtake us. 

4. We were deceived in this, because smoke appeared. 


239. Sec. 16-21. 


1. At sunset, the very * wood of the houses will be carried 
off by the king. } 

2. We made a great® noise by calling one another, so that 
the enemy were terrified.® 

3. A panic, however, fell upon the Greeks also.’ 

4. He said that whoever disclosed this would receive® a 
talent. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 


240. Learn the following important words which occur 
in Chapters I and II. Memorize the principal parts of the 
verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference between 
the active and middle meanings. 


I. ἄκων 8. γελάω 

2. ἅμα 9. δύνω 

3. ἀναγκάΐζω 10. ἐμπίπτω 

4. ἀπαγγέλλω 11. ἐσθίω 

5. ἀνέχω .12. εὑρίσκω 
6. ἄπειρος 13. ἐξοπλίζω 

7. βοῦς 14. Cao } 


1See 74. 2H. 1032: G. 1360: B. 569, 2: Go. 489, a. 8 See the vocab- 
ulary for the difference between the active and middle meaning of φαίνω. 
4 Review all the uses of αὐτός: 46. ὅ Use πολύς. 6 So that... terrified: 
is this a purpose or a result clause? 7 καί, meaning a/so, precedes the word 
it emphasizes. 8. whoever... receive. the direct statement was whoever dis- 
closes this will receive. 


ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAPS. I-II 99 


15. ἥλιος 27. οἷόν τε 40. σημαίνω 
16. θύω (act. and 28. ὄμνυμι 41. συμβουλεύω 
| mid.) 29. ὄνος 42. σωτηρία 
17. κηρύττω 30. παραδίδωμι 43. σῶος 

18. κῆρυξ 31. περιμένω 44. τιτρώσκω 
19. κατασκηνόώ 32. πορίζω 45. τοίνυν 
20. σκήνωμα 33. προτεραῖος 46. τολμάω 
21. καταλαμβάνω 34. ὑστεραῖος 47. φέρω 

22. κόπτω 35. σιγῆ 48. φρονέω 
23. κρέας 36. σκότος 49. Ψεύδω 
24. λόγχη 37. okoTatos 50. χρῆ 

25. μάχομαι 38. στόλος 

26. ξίφος 39. συμμίγνυμι 


241. Review the following points of syntax: 


I. 


Wishes. [H. 870, 871, a: G. 1507, 1511, 1512: B. 587, 588: Go. 


470, 476. ] 

2. Contrary to fact conditions. [H. 895: G. 1397: B. 606: 
Go. 649. ] 

3. Must and Ought. See 74 and 75. 

4. Prohibitions. [H. 874, a: G. 1346: B. 584: Go. 485.] 

5. Purpose clauses. See 78 and 79. 

6. Construction used after ἀγγέλλω. [H. 981: G. 1588: 
B. 661: Go. 586.] 

7. The negative of the protasis. [H. ro1g, 1021: G. 1383, 1: 
B. 600: Go. 646.] 

8. Verbs followed by μή and the Infinitive. See 141. 

9. Uses of αὐτός. See 46. | 

10. Cognate Accusative. [H. 715, ὁ: G. 1057: B. 331: Go. 
536.] | 

II. Verbal in téos. See 75. 

12. Emphatic future. [H. 1032: G. 1360: B. 569, 2: Go. 


I0O GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


242. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 240 and involving the constructions in 
241. These sentences should be written by the students 
at sight. 


BOOK II— CHAPTER III 


243. Sec. 1-8. 


1. At sunrise, he told! the heralds to wait until he was at 
leisure.” 
2. He stationed the army so that everybody was well 
ἐπ armed, 
3. We will lead you to a place? whence you will get pro- 
visions. 
4. It was not clear that the truce was for every one. 


244. Sec. 9-15. 


1. He feared, however, that our‘ soldiers also® would have 
the same fear. 

2. He found that the trees had fallen down, so that they 
could not cross.® 

3. If any one did not jump into the mud, he struck” him. 

4. One cannot ® see such palms in Greece. 


245. Sec. 16-21. 


1. Whenever the soldiers ate these, they wondered at the 
- peculiarity of the flavor. 


1 εἶπον is sometimes used in the sense of command, and then is followed 
by the Infinitive, instead of ὅτι and ὧς. 2 wait... leisure: the direct com- 
mand was wait until J am at leisure. See 122,128,124. 8 Omit “το ἃ place. 
4our... fear = the same fear would be to our soldiers. Use the Dative of 
possession. ὅ καί, 50... cross: H. 927: G. 1449, 1450: B. 595: Go. 
566, ὁ; 639,4. With the Infinitive the negative is μή; with the Indicative, ov. 
7 ἄν and the Aorist or Imperfect expresses a customary past action, and therefore 
may be used in the conclusion of a past general condition. 8 Cf. ἔστιν ἰδεῖν. 


ANABASIS BOOK I; CHAP: ἵν, > > TOI 


2. I will ask the king! to give me the Seiiaene? of dbing 
this. 
I was the only one who arrived? with help. 
4. We did not assemble with the avowed purpose‘ of 
leading you here. 


Ψ» 


246. Sec. 22--20. 


1. Now that® Cyrus is dead, we shall not betray you. 

2. They would not kill him, if you would not trouble® 
them. 

3. I did not allow him to buy provisions. 

4. Afterwards,’ the brother-in-law of the king took an oath. 


BOOK II—CHAPTER IV 
247. Sec. I-5. 


1. He does not bear malice against you ® for the past. 

2. He will destroy the Greeks, that others may fear to 
make an expedition against him." 

3. He would not willingly, at least, wish” us to go away 
and mock 15 him. 

4. If we should do this, Ariaeus would not lead us. 


248. Sec. 6-11. 
1. I know” that the cavalry of the enemy is efficient.” 


1 Genitive with mapa. 2 Omit: see the idiom in the text, sec. 18. 8.7 
was... arrived =I only (μόνος) arrived. * with... purpose: H. 978: 
G. 1574: B. 656, 3: Go. 593, c. 5 Now that: éwel. 8 would... trouble: 
what kind ‘of a condition? 7 After this. 8 brother of the wife. 5 Dative. 
10H. 744: G. 1126: B. 366: Go. 509, c. 1! This refers to the subject of de- 
stroy. What kind ofa pronoun? would not wish: ἄν and the Optative. 
3 and mock = having mocked: use the Aorist participle. 4H. 741: G. 
1109: B. 356: Go. 510,c. 1 H. 982: G. 1588: B. 661: Go. 586. 16 πολ- 
᾿λοῦ ἄξιος. 


- c ἐ 


api Lorene ere COMPOSITION — PART II 


2. πὶ 1 we “shold te conquered, whom would we save ? 

3. If! Tissaphernes leads, we will proceed by ourselves. 

4. This furnished suspicion so that they kept? away from 
each other. 


249. Sec. 12-17. 


This wall was twenty parasangs® long.* 
2. They arrived at a city which was twenty stadia distant 
from the park. 
3. ‘The pickets asked where they could see® the generals. 
4. He intended to attack us, so that we could not ® cross. 


250. Sec. 18-23. 


1. The intention to attack’ us frightened me. 

2. If there are many across the river, it will not be neces- 
sary for us to flee. 

3. We asked him how many villages there were.® 

4. I fear® to do harm to the king. 


251. Sec. 24-28. 


1. When it is dawn, he intends to attack” them while 
crossing. 
2. He halted his own" army while the Greeks were pass- 
ing by. : 
1H. 969, σ᾽: G. 1563, 5: B. 614: Go. 583. 250... heft. if the actual 
result is expressed, what mood is used? % What case expresses the measure? 


4 = in length: Accusative of specification. ὅ where they could see: direct, 
where can we see? TH. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480. © μή is the nega- 


tive of purpose clauses, after ἵνα, ὡς, or ὅπως. 7 The... attack: the Infini- 
tive with (or without) the article is used as the subject. What tense would 
be used here? ὃ how... ere. what was the direct question? 9. Consult 


the vocabulary for the two meanings of oxvéw and the constructions following 
it. 19 What tense often follows μέλλω See the text. 1 The possessive 
Genitive of the reflexive is in the attributive position. 


ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAPS. III-IV 103 


3. As long as he looked! on, so long the Persian was 
terrified. 


4. He proceeded thirty parasangs, keeping the river on 
his right. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III AND IV 


252. Learn the following important words which occur 
in Chapters III and IV. Memorize the principal parts 
of the verbs,.-and, where indicated, notice the difference 
between the active and middle meanings. 


I. αἰσχύνω (act. and mid.) 21. ἔτος 

2. αἰσχύνη ᾿ 22. ἐσθίω 

3. ἀπέχω 23. ἔπίσταμαι 
4. παρέχω 24. ἐφίστημι 

5. αἰτέω 25. ἔπίστασις 
6. ἐρωτάω 26. ἐπιστρατεύω 
7, ἀνερωτάω 27. ἐἔπιστρατεία 
8. ἀφίημι 28. ἔχθρα 

9. ἄχρι 29. ζητέω 

10. βοήθεια 30. ἡγέομαι 

II. γείτων 31. ἡσυχία 

12. γέ 32. θνήσκω 

13. διανοέομαι 33. ἀποκτείνω 
14. διατρίβω 34. μῆκος 

15. δοῦλος 35. ὕψος 

16. δασύς 36. νοῦς 

17. ἐκπλήττω 37. οἷος 

18. ἔφοδος | 38. ὅθεν 

19. ἐντυγχάνω 39. ὁπισθοφυλακέω 
20. εὐθύς 40. ὀκνέω 


1 This is a past general condition. 


104 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


Al. προδίδωμι 45. συσπουδάζω 409. φράζω᾽ 


42. προθυμέομαι 46. σχολάζω 50. Ψευδής 
43. σπεύδω 47. ταράττω 

44. σπουδάζω 48. ὑποψία 

958. Review the following points of syntax: . 


1. Until, 122, 123, 194. 

2. Result clauses and their negatives. [H. 927: G. 1449- 
50: B. 595: Go. 566, ὁ, 639, a. ] : 
3. ὡς and the participle. [Η. 978: G. 1574: B. 656, 3: Go. 
593, ¢] 

4. μετά with the Genitive and the Accusative. 

5. Genitive of cause. [H. 744: G.1126: B. 366: Go. 509, c.] 

6. Case after verbs of Ruling. ([H. 741: G. 1109: B. 356: 
Go, 510. ] 

7. Verbs followed by the participle in indirect dis- 
course. [H. 981, 982: G. 1588: B. 661: Go. 586.] 

8. Participle for the protasis. [H. 969, 4: G. 1563, 5: B. 
614: Go. 583. ] 

9. Potential Optative. [H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480.] 

10. What case expresses the measure? 


254. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 252 and involving the constructions in 253. 
These sentences should be written by the students at sight. 


BOOK II—CHAPTER V 
255. Sec. 1-8. 


1. They put an end?! to these suspicions before? he met 
Clearchus. 

2. I perceive by observation ® that you can not dispel the 
distrust. 


1 παύω in the active means to make stop; in the middle, to cease. 7 See 
126. * by observation = by observing: present participle. 


ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. V 105 


3. Some! do irreparable evils to their friends; others! do 
not intend to. 

4. In the present case, into what sort of darkness can we 
run? off? 


256. Sec. 9-15. 


1. If we should try to kill you, every? crowd would be 
very frightful. 

Who is so mad as not to use* the forces of the king ? 

3. I think that I should punish® them by using you as 
allies. 

This being the case,® I shall not distrust you.’ 


Ν 


Ἂν 


257. Sec. 16-23. 


Well,® Clearchus, do I seem to lack infantry? 
2. There are so many mountains over which? you must 
proceed. 
3. How, then, could we do 19 this by perjury ? 
4. I know in how many ways" you are useful to me. 


258. Sec. 24-33. 

1. Those who try to slander us are worthy ” of suffering 
death. 

Clearchus evidently thought that he ought to go to 
Tissaphernes. 


ὃ 


loi μέν... οἱ δέ. 2 The potential Optative. 8. πᾶς in the singular without 
the article often means every. *See 159. ὅ should punish: the student will 
notice that when ἄν and the Infinitive depend upon οἶμαι, ἄν is placed close to 
οἶμαι. ὁ This... case: cf. the idiom in the text, sec. 12. 7H. 764, 2: G. 
1160: B. 376: Go. 520. 8 ἀλλά. 59 over which: H.715, ὁ: G.1057: B. 331: 
Go. 536. 10 could we do. cf. πῶς ἄν ἐξελοίμεθα, sec. 20. Nin... ways: an 
Accusative of specification. 12 ἄξιος is one of the adjectives followed by the 
Infinitive. 


106 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


3. We suspect that he is secretly meeting the enemy with! 
Ariaeus. 
4. At the same signal we killed whoever were? inside. 


259. Sec. 34-42. 


1. We were all frightened, and thought® i the king 
would come Loe avey: 
He will demand of us* our arms, because we are his! 
We swore that we would betray the same men. 
4. Send our generals here, since they will give the best 
advice® for both you and us. 


we oN 


BOOK II— CHAPTER VI 


260. Sec. I-7 


1. These generals, who had been captured’ in this way, 
were beheaded. . 

2. When he no longer obeyed, he sailed off® to RAGE, WAR 
on the Thracians. 

3. When Clearchus is allowed ® to have money, he chooses 
to spend it on war. 

4. All acknowledged that he was warlike and fond of 
danger. 


261. Sec. 8-15. 


1. Clearchus was capable™ of impressing on his soldiers 
that they must obey him.” 


1 Genitive with μετά ; not Dative with σύν. 2 we... énside: what kind 
of a condition? 8 were frightened and thought = being frightened, thought. 
* Would this be Genitive? H. 724: G. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535. 5 of him. 
6 give the best advice = advise the best things. “who... captured: see 40. 
ὃ sailed off = went off sailing. 9. When... allowed: H. 973: G.1569: B 
343: Go. 591. 3) H. 981: G. 1588: B. 661: Go. 586. 14H. 952: G. 1526: 
B. 641: Go. 565, a. An indirect reflexive. 


ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. VI 107 


2. He used to say! that the soldiers ought to fear him 
more than they do the enemy. 

Whenever they could,? many chose another general. 

The fact that they did not fear® the enemy made them 
courageous. 


2 all” as 


262. Sec. 16-23. 


1. From early boyhood, Proxenus desired great power.* 
2. He did not think that he ought to impress on his sol- 
diers fear of himself.® 
Those who did wrong ® evidently distrusted him. 
4. Menon is deceitful, that he may do wrong without’ 
being punished. 


τὰς 


263. Sec. 24--30. 


1. We thought that we alone knew how many were® per- 
jured. 
Menon delighted in® being able to slander his friends. 
3. By doing wrong’ with them, he expected his soldiers 
to obey him.” 
4. Although they had done ® the same things, his fellow 
generals were not tortured. 


1 What tense expresses this idea? 2 they could: use ἔξειμι. *% The fact 
... fear: the Infinitive with the article is often used as the subject of a verb. 
The negative is μή. * ἐπιθυμέω is followed by the Genitive. ὅ What kind 
of a reflexive? © 7hose... wrong: see 40. 7 that... punished: notice 
the idiom at the end of sec. 21, in the text. 8 The direct question was how 
many are? 59 in being able: see 161. © By doing wrong: ἐκ τοῦ and the 
Infinitive. 11 ἀξιόω. 1 Review the use of the reflexives. See 48 and 47. 
138 Although... done: H. 969, e: G. 1563, 6: B. 653, 7: Go. 583. 


108 


GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS V AND VI 


264. Learn the following important words which occur 
Memorize the principal parts of 
the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference be- 


in Chapters V and VI. 


tween the active and middle meanings. 


αἰκίζω 
ἀπιστέω 
ἀπιστία 
ἀδικέω 
ἀξιόω 
διαπτράττω 
δύσπορος 
εὔπορος 
ri kall) 
ἐμποιέω 
. ἐλεύθερος 
. ἐπιθυμέω 
. ἐπιθυμία 
. ἔξειμι 

. ὅρκος 
ἔπιορκέω 
ἐπιορκία 


ΘῸ MNAUDwWDH τ 


— "᾿ 
No = 


— = Ss het 
Ow Rh ὦ» 


μι 
m= 


25. 
20. 
ΧΎ, 
28. 
20. 
30. 
31. 
42. 
33. 
34. 


ἔπίορκος 
ἑρμηνεύς 
εὐεργετέω 


. εὐεργέτης 
. εὐεργεσία 
. θανατόω 


ἥδομαι 
καταγελάω 
κατεργάζομαι 
κολάζω 
κτάομαι 
κτῆμα 
μαίνομαι 
μεταμέλω 
μέμφομαι 
οἰκεῖος 
ὁμολογέω 


. παύω (αςί. and 


mid.) 
πονηρός 
πάρειμι 
πόρος 
ἄπορος 


. σαφῶς 

. συναδικέω 

. συνακολουθέω 
43. 
44. 
45. 
46. 
47. 
48. 
49. 
50. 


συγγίγνομαι 
σημεῖον 
τάχος 
τιμωρέω 
τιμωρία 
τρόπος 
ψεύδω 
ἐξαπατάω 


265. Review the following points of syntax: 


of wr 


376: ed 520. | 


Before, 126. 
πᾶς with and without the article. 
Relative clause of result, 159. 

Verbs followed OF the Dative. 


[H. 672, ὁ: Β. 455.] 


[H. 764, 2: G. 1160: B, 


ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. I 109 


5. Verbals in τέος. [H. 988-990: G. 1594-97: B. 663-666: Go. 
352-354-] 
6. δῆλος and φανερός (εἰμί). [H. 981: G. 1589: B. 661: Go. 


586. } : 
7. Verbs followed by two Accusatives. [H. 724: G. 1069: 


B. 340: Go. 535.] 
8. Use of the participle for a relative clause, 40. 


9. Accusative absolute. [H. 973: G. 1569: B. 343: Go. 591. 
10. Adjectives followed by the Infinitive. [Η. 952: 6. 
. 1526: B. 641: Go. 565, a.] 

11. Use of the reflexive pronouns, 43, 47. 

12. The article and the Infinitive, 161. 

13. Various meanings of the participle. [H. 969: G. 1563: 
B. 653, 1-8: Go. 583.] 


266. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 264 and involving the constructions in 
265. These sentences should be written by the students 
at sight. 


BOOK III—CHAPTER I 
267. Sec. 1-5. 


1. If noone furnishes a market place for the Greeks, they 
will not taste of food.? 

2. They think that they 3 will never again see their wives 
and children. 

3. I promise you that, if you come, Cyrus will be*® your 
friend. 

4. They suspected * that Xenophon would become a friend 
to the Spartans. 


1H. 742: G. 1102: B. 356: Go. 510. 2 When may the subject of an 
Infinitive be. omitted? δ that... will be: what was the direct discourse? 
4 H. 887: G. 1378: B. 594: Go. 610, 611. 


ΓΙῸ GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


268. Sec. 6-12. 


1. He asks the god whether! it is better for him? to go or 
to remain at Athens. 

2. As soon as I set out on the journey inland, the expedi- 
tion will be against the Pisidians.® 

3. It was clear that the majority * were unwilling. 

4. He feared that the dream was from Zeus. 


269. Sec. 13-18. 


1. If we get into the® power of the enemy at in Aeaans 
we shall never be older. 

2. We declared war against the enemy before we made 
preparations. 

3. Would they not resort® to every means to torture 
us? : 

4. We must take care that he does not make us slaves.’ 


270. Sec. 19-25. 


1. I never ceased considering how many provisions the 
king has. 
2. We have no share® in these good things, except by pur- 
chase.?® 
3. Since we do not perjure ourselves,” we refrain from 
these prizes. 
If you do not wish me to lead, I will follow you. 


- 


1See 186. 2 To whom does this refer? % As soon... Pisidians : a vivid 
future relative condition. 4 the majority: ot πολλοί. ὅ into the power of: 
ἐπί with the Dative. © Would... resort: H. 1015: G. 1603: B.572: Go. 668. 
1 that... slaves: H. 885: G. 1372: B. 593: Go. 638, a. 8 See the vocabulary 
for the construction following μέτειμι, 9 except by purchase = if we do not buy. 
What negative is used in the protasis? 1 Since... ourselves: participle. 


ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. I III 


Ὑ 271. Sec. 26-33. 


τ. We can not get safety! in any other way than by per- 
suading the king. 
2. We will not surrender our arms until? we get a 
truce. 
I think that we ought to take away his captaincy. 
4. Wherever there is no general, they summon a lieu- 
tenant general. 


WN 


272. Sec. 34-38. 


1. We shall plan whatever good we can.8 

2. If you should not evidently be making preparations 
against the enemy, the soldiers would be cowards.. 

3. Know well, however, that you get more honor than 
these.* 

4. By® doing this, I think that you would help the 
army. 


273. Sec. 39-47. 


1. This being the case, I know that ney would go to their 
arms despondently. 
Soldiers, strive® to die nobly. 
.. We praised them for what they said and did. 
4. Let us elect the generals and come’ into the middle of 
the camp. 


WN 


1Cf. the text in sec. 26. 2 until... truce: see 122,123,124. 8 what- 


ever... can = if we are able any good thing. Review conditions in 118-115. 
4 get... these = get more than these in honor. ° By doing this: use patti- 
ciple. δώ die nobly: περὶ τοῦ and the Infinitive. ‘ Zet us elect... and 


come = having elected... let us come (hortatory Subjunctive). 


[12 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


BOOK III—CHAPTER II 
274. Sec. 1-6. 


1. After the election of the generals,! Chirisophus said, 
“Our former allies have deserted us.”’ 

2. May we never, at least alive, get” into the hands of the 
enemy. 

3. He swore in person® that he would consider it of the 
greatest importance not to destroy us. 

4. We must never again suffer this. | 


275. Sec. 7-II. 


1. It is right* to equip myself for war as best I can. 

2. If we inflict punishment® on the enemy, we shall not 
be greatly discouraged. 

3. I happened to be saying that the enemy have hones 
the truce, contrary to the oaths. 

4. The Persians came to destroy® Athens utterly. 


276. Sec. 12-17. 


1. We vowed that we would find as many she-goats as we 
killed’ of the enemy. 

Although ® Xerxes collected a numberless host, he did 
not, at that time, conquer our ancestors. 


ἣν 


1 After . .. generals = when the generals had been elected.. H. 837: G 
1261. * May...get: see 70-72. *in person: αὐτός. 4 /¢ is right: use 
ὀρθῶς ἔχω. Notice that ἔχω with adverbs means Zo be. 5 inflict punishment: 
for this expression, see the text (sec. 8, line 7). 9.20 destroy... utterly: ex- 
press in at least three ways. See 79. 7 we would... killed: the vow in the 
direct form was we will find... as we kill, which was a vivid future relative 
condition. * How is a concession commonly expressed in Greek? See H. 
969, ¢: G. 1563, 6: B. 653, 7: Go. 583. 


ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. II 13 


Why is it fitting for you to be more courageous? 
Do not! be drawn up with the men of Ariaeus. 


PY 


. 277. Sec. 18-23. 


1. Bear in mind that horsemen are not the? ones WAG win 
victories. 

2. We will strike whomever we wish. 

3. It is better to take provisions than to use their® measure. 

4. I say that we are braver than they are.* 


, 278. Sec. 24-28. 


1. I, at least, say that you ought to live somewhere® here. 

2. If we had once learned to live in idleness, we should 
have forgotten ® the way home. 

3. It is the privilege of the conquerors to say how many‘ 
good things they can have.® 

4. In the second place I think it is best to get rid of the 
superfluous baggage. 


279. Sec. 29-34. 


1. They thought that we should perish, if there were no® 
leaders. 

2. You ought to punish the one who disobeys.” . 

3. In this way you will allow no one to be a coward. 

4. Let all who think this best raise! their hands. 


1 Do... up: see 62. * the ones who win: see 40.— win: row. ὃ Use 
ἐκεῖνος in the predicate position. *Omit. ὅ Notice that ποῦ, where ? is an 
interrogative, while πού is enclitic, meaning somewhere. Likewise πῶς, how ? 
πώς, somehow. ®©H.742:G 1102: B.356: Go. 511. ‘how many. ὁπόσα. 
« how many... have; the direct question was a potential Optative, how many 
good things can we have? H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480. % When the 
participle is used for the protasis, the negative is py. 190 the one who dis- 
obeys: see 40. 1! Let all raise: the third person of the Imperative is used 
in exhortations of the third person. 

GK. PROSE COMP. — ὃ 


[14 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART IX 


280. Sec. 35-39. - 


1. If the enemy should follow after us, it would probably 
be safer for us to form! a square. 

2. We ought to be able to use immediately those who 
have been drawn up. 

3. May Chirisophus for the present lead this square. 

4. Let us therefore remember? to be brave. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 


281. Learn the following important words which occur 
in Chapters I and II. Memorize the principal parts of the 
verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference between 
the active and middle meanings. 


I. ἀγείρω 14. διείργω 

2. ἀθυμέω I5. ἔτι 

3. ἀθυμία 16. ἔκγονος 

4. ἀθύμως 17. πρόγονος 
5. αἰδέομαι 18. ἐπιμελέομαι 
6. apive IQ. ἔπιμελής 
7. ἀναγιγνώσκω 20. ἡττάομαι 
8. ἀνακοινόω 21. καθεύδω 
9. ἀναμένω , 22. κατάκειμαι 
10. ἀνατείνω 23. καιρός 

II. ἀποτίνω | 24. λήγω 

12. ἀρχαῖος 25. λαγχάνω 
13. ἄφθονος 26. λυπέω 


1 ποιέξω. 2 Let us remember: in an exhortation of the first person, use 
the Subjunctive; in one of the third person, the Imperative. Notice that the 
Perfect middle of μιμνήσκω is used with a present meaning. Note the differ- 
ence between the active and middle meaning. 


ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAPS. 


lA 


27. λυπή 
28. μιμέομαι 

29. μιμνήσκω (act. and mid.) 
30. ὄχλος 

31. πατρίς 

32. πλαίσιον 

33. πόθος 

34. προθυμέομαι 

35. συνπροθυμέομαι 

36. σαφής 

37. ἀσάφεια 

38. σκεῦος 


39. 
. σκευοφόρος 
. στέρομαι 
. ὑβρίζω 

. ὕβρις 


45. 
46. 
47. 
48. 
49. 
50. 


I-II 115 


σκευοφορέω 


ὑπολαμβάνω 
ὑφίημι 
ὑφίστημι 
ψῦχος 

ψυχή 
ψηφίζω 


ὠνέομαι 


282. Review the following points of syntax: 


1. Verbs followed by the Genitive. 


356: Go. 510, 511.] 
2. Indirect questions, 136. 


3. ὅπως and the Future Indicative. 


593: Go. 638, @.] 


Relative conditions, 113-115. 
Wishes, 70-72. 

Purpose clauses, 79. 
Prohibitions, 62. 


ΘῸ ON AWA 


11. Exhortations, 59 and 60. 


General conditions, 92, 107-109. 


Participle for a relative clause, 40. 
Potential Optative. [H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480.] 


[H. 742: G, 1102: B, 


ΓΗ 885: G. 1372: B. 


12. The Perfect middle system of μιμνήσκω. 


283. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 281 and involving the constructions in 282. 
These sentences should be written. by the students at sight. 


116 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


BOOK III—CHAPTER III 
284. Sec. 1-6. 


1. We shall share with one another whatever we do ποῖ 
throw 1 into the fire. | 
2. If I should see that they are planning some safety, I 
should tell you what I have in mind. 
You cannot be saved without my consent.? 
4. When Mithridates appears, we shall go away.® 


Ὁ» 


285. Sec. 7--14. 


1. We do not shoot far enough to reach the Persians.* 

2. While we were fleeing, we injured them by shooting ὃ 
backward. 

3. Within this day, we must pass over ® twenty stadia. 

4. I suffered harm in not advancing.’ 


986. Sec. 15--20. 


1. The barbarians were so swift that we could not catch 
them. 

2. We need slingers,® in order to injure them as they pro- 
ceed. 

3. If you give them money, they will probably help us 
somewhat.? © 

4. I see that many horses have been left behind. 


1 whatever... throw: H. 1019, 1021: G. 1383, 1: B. 600: Go. 646. 
2 without my consent: cf. βασιλέως ἄκοντος. ὃ. go away: cf. ᾧχετο ἀπιών. 
4 We... Persians: cf. the text in latter part of sec. 7. 5 dy shooting: use 
the participle. © pass over: διέρχομαι. 77: not advancing: ἐν τῷ and In- 
finitive. See H.1023: G,1611, Genitive. 9 = in respect to something, τὶ, 


ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. IV 117 


BOOK III— CHAPTER IV 
287. Sec. I-09. 


1. I fear that they must! cross the ravine. 

2. We promised that if he should give us so many, we 
would do much damage.” 

3. When the enemy follow,’ the Greeks will mutilate the 
dead. 

4. This city was taken by * siege. 


288. Sec. 10-17. 


1. This wall was one hundred and fifty feet high. 

2. They came into view® with the force with which they 
aided the king. 

3. Whenever the Rhodians shot, they did not miss their ® 
man.’ 

4. We shall continue to use® the arrows which have been 
taken. 


289. Sec. 18-23. 


1. The Greeks happened upon the village, and laid in pro- 
visions during the following day. 
If the road is ever too® narrow, the hoplites are thrown 
into confusion. 
3. Whenever they had to cross a bridge, the enemy at- 
tacked them. 


x 


1H. 411: G. 495, 1, 2: B. 199, 2: Go. 321. 2%do...damage: ποιέω 
πολλὰ κακά. ὃ When... follow: Genitive absolute. 4 dy siege = by besieging. 
5 cam? into view: notice the difference in meaning between φαίνω and ém- 
φαίνω. © Omit. 7H. 748: G. 1099. 8 continue to use: H. 981: G. 1580: 
B. 660: Go. 585. % The comparative degree often expresses this idea. 


118 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


4. The interval! was so? wide that they did not® cross by 
companies. 


290. Sec. 24-33. 


1. Then the Persians attacked them, as they were ascend- 
ing the second hill. 

2. The light-armed soldiers will be useless, because they 
are shut up? inside of the hoplites. 

3. We feared that they would go along parallel with us. 

4. Necessity taught the barbarians not® to skirmish with 
the Greeks. 


291. Sec. 34-40. 


1. The Persian has to® mount his horse when there is 
confusion. 

2. The Greeks broke camp within hearing of the enemy.’ 

3. On the fourth day, the Greeks intended to pass by the 
spur of a mountain. 

4. We can® see that the hill has been taken ahead of us. 


292. Sec. 41-49. 


1. If you desire, take® the men and proceed to the moun- 
tain. 7 
2. ‘ Well,” 5414 15. Xenophon, “I urge you to send picked 


men with me.” 


1 τὸ διέχον. 2 οὕτω. % If the Infinitive follows ὥστε, the negative is μή, 
while οὐ is the negative used with the Indicative. 4 because... shut up: 
H. 969, 4: Ὁ. 1563, 2: B. 653, 4: Go. 583. 5px is the regular negative for 
the Infinitive. In indirect discourse οὐ may be used, being retained from οὐ of 
the direct. 6 as to: bear in mind that δεῖ is regularly followed by the Accu- 
sative and the Infinitive, not the Dative. 7 within... enemy. Genitive ab- | 
solute. 8 ἔξεστι. 5 Participle; what tense? 10 Notice that φημί is the 
verb of saying, which is generally used in the middle of a direct quotation. 


ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAPS. III-V 19 


Consider that after a little toil! you will see your wives. 
We captured the height before? the Persians. 


i 


BOOK III— CHAPTER V 


293. Sec. I-09. 


1. These were captured while scattered in the plain. 

2. We are apprehensive lest they should not concede the 
country to be ours. 

3. The river was so deep’ that they did not try the depth.* 

4. Provide for me what® I need. 


294. Sec. 10-18. 


1. By throwing on wood, I shall keep you from slipping.® 

2. The captives’ said that the king passed the summer at 
Susa. 

3. They also said ® that these people made a treaty in the 
plain. 

4. Whenever they eat dinner, everybody halts. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III, IV, AND V 


᾿ 295. Learn the following important words which occur 
in Chapters III, IV, and V. Memorize the principal parts 
of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
between the active and middle meanings. 


I. αἴξ 3. ἄκρον 5. ἁμιλλάομαι 
2. αἰχμάλωτος 4. ἀκροβολίζομαι 6. ἀποτέμνω 


1 after... toil: participle. 23 captured... before: use φθάνω. See the 
text at end of sec. 49. See 169. 8.0 deep =so0 much in respect to depth. 
4H. 738: G. 1099: B. 356: Go. 510. 5 What case follows verbs of plenty 
and want? ὁ from slipping = so as not to slip. " the captives = those who 
had been taken. ὃ Use φημί. 


120 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


7. ἀπονοστέω 17. διαφθερω. 27. ἀναζεύγνυμι 
8. ἁμαρτάνω 18. μεταδίδωμι 28. ἡνίκα 
9. ἀναχωρέω 19. ἀντιδίδωμι 29. κάω 
10. ἔπαναχωρέω 20. ἐπιγίγνομαι 480. κινέω 
II. ἀσκός 21. ἔπισιτίζομαι 431. παρακελεύομαι 
12. ἄχρηστος 22. ἔπιτυγχάνω 482. διακελεύομαι 
13. δύσχρηστος 23. ἐξικνέομαι 33. κατακλείω 
14. βέλος 24. ἐξαπίνης 34. καταφρονέω 
15. βραχύς 25. ἔπιμίγνυμι 35. λόφος 
16. δέω 26. ἵζεύγνυμι 36. γήλοφος 

37. λοιδορέω 44. πόρρω 

38. μακρός. 45. σκεδάννυμι 

39. νοέω 46. στρέφω 

40. ἐννοέομαι 47. στενός 

41. ὀλισθάνω 48. ὑψηλός 

42. ὅμοιος 49. φάσκω 

43. πλατύς 50. φθάνω 


296. Review the following points of syntax: 


1. Negative of protasis and apodosis. [H. 1o19, 1021: G. 
1383, 1: B. 600: Go. 646. ] 

2. The negative used with Infinitive. [H. 1023: G. 1611: 
B. 633: Go. 564.] 

3. Contraction of dissyllabics in €m. [H. 411: G. 495, 1, 2: 
B. 199, 2: Go. 321. ] 

4. Verbs governing the Genitive. [H. 748, 738: G. 1099: B. 
356: Go. 510, 511.] , 

5. Supplementary participle. [Η. 981: G. 1580: B. 660: Go. 
585.] 

6. The negatives with result clauses, 289, note 4. 

7. Various translations of the participle. [Η΄. 969: G. 
1563: B. 653: Go. 583. ] 

8. Use of φθάνω, 169. 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. I 121 


297. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 295 and involving the constructions in 
296. These sentences should be written by the students 
at sight. 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER I 
298. Sec. I-10. 


1. I hear from the captives! that we shall have to? cross 
the sources of the Tigris. 

2. There was danger that the enemy would perceive? 
them. 

3. The Greeks did not carry off their wives and children, 
in order that they might let them pass through. 

4. Some of the Carduchi suddenly fell upon the Greeks. 


299. Sec. 11-18. 


1. If, however, the enemy had been more numerous, we 
should all have been wounded. 

2. The generals decided that they must leave the rest 
behind, because there were many disabled.* 

3. Whenever the snow is deep,°® the enemy attack us vigor- 
ously. | 

4. A brave man was shot in the head.® 


300. Sec. 19-28. 


— 


- We could not bury the dead and fight at the same time.” 


1 from the captives: Genitive of source. 2 have to: use Sw. 8 that... 
perceive H. 887: G. 1378: B.594: Go. 610, 611. 4 because... disabled: 
Genitive absolute. — disabled: ἀπόμαχος. ὅ πολύς. 6 in the head: H. 718: 
G. 1058: B. 337: Go. 537. "bury... time: cf. φεύγοντες ἅμα μάχεσθαι in 
sec. 19. ; 


[22 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


2. If they trouble! us, I will form an ambush and take? 


them alive. 

3. The guide was asked if it were impossible to pass by 
the height. 

4. “The whole® army,” said he, “will follow under my 
command.” 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER II 


301. Sec. 1-6. 


1. After binding the guide, we agreed to hold the pass 
during the day. 
We must cross without being seen.‘ 
They tried to approach the entrance® until it was dark. 
4. The guards thought that they were encamped on this 
road. 


302. Sec. 7-13. 


1. When they heard the trumpet,® Chirisophus and _ his 
men rushed against the enemy. 
2. He had to either proceed along’ the road or be cut off 
from the rest. 
If we leave a retreat, the enemy will escape. 
4. Xenophon feared that the hill would be taken ® by the 
enemy. 7 


yeaah 


i 


303. Sec. 14-21. 


We suspected ® that we should be surrounded if they 
should depart. . 


— 
. 


1 πράγματα παρέχω. 7 form... and take τε having formed... shall 
take. ὃ πᾶς has the predicate position. 4 cross... seen: cf. λάθοιεν in sec. 
2, and for its use, see H. 984: G. 1586: B. 660, n.: G. 585, a. ὅ Dative. 
6 H. 742: G. 1102: B. 356: Go. 511. κατά. 8 What verb is regularly 
used as the passive of aipéw? 59 Is this a verb of saying or thinking? 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. III 123 


2. He said that they arrived at the village by jumping 
down the ledge. 

We shall give up the dead on condition that! the enemy 
do not rush against us. 

4. One man had his leg crushed.? 


ys 


304. Sec. 22-28. 
The wine was so plentiful that they encamped ὃ there. 
Whenever Xenophon sallied forth from the rear, he 
got above the blockaders.* 
3. Sometimes ὃ we troubled the barbarians. 
4. The arrows which they used were more than two cubits 
in length. 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER III 
305. Sec. I-09. 
1. They remembered ® all’ they suffered at the hands of 


NO = 


the king. 

2. They armed themselves to prevent the enemy from 
crossing.§ 

3. If they ever retreated, they became exposed to the . 
missiles. 


4. During® this night, Xenophon had a dream. 


306. Sec. 10-17. 


1. One might approach Xenophon while he was eating 
dinner. 


1 on condition that: ἐφ᾽ @ and the Infinitive. 2. had... crushed =was 
crushed in respect to his leg. ὃ What is the difference between the Indicative 
and Infinitive in a result clause after ὥστε H. 927: G. 1450: B. 595: Go. 
566, 4,639, a. 4 the blockaders = those hindering. ὃ ἣν δὲ ὁπότε. © Hz. 
742: G. 1102: B. 356: Go. 511. 7 = all things as many as, πάντων ὅσων. 
8 from crossing: H. 963: G. 1549: B. 643: Go. 572-573. % Is this duration 
of time? 10 one might = it was impossible to (ἔξεστι). 


[24 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


2. They decided that it was safe to strip and cross! the 
river. | 
3. How? can we conquer? those in front? 
The young men led the way, with some on their right _ 
and some on their left. | 


= 


307. Sec. 18-26. 


1. He runs at full speed to shut off the men along the 
river. 

2. We shouted to them ποῖ to flee. 

3. When we saw what was going on® across the river, we 
attacked the enemy. 

4. Xenophon passed along the command to wheel against 
the Carduchi. 


308. Sec. 27-34. 


1. Whenever we begin to cross, we sing songs. 

2. He ordered us to run as soon as the enemy wheeled 
about.® 

3. The man who gets across first’ will be the best. 

4. When the Greeks had crossed, the majority were still 
plainly 8 running. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I, II, AND III 


309. Learn the following important words which occur 
in Chapters I, II, and III. Memorize the principal parts 


1 fo strip and cross = having stripped to cross. 2 πῶς. ὃ κα: we con- 
quer: H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480. μη. 5 what was going on: 
see 40. Srun... about: the direct command was, as soon as the enemy 
wheel about, run. Remember that the Imperative expresses future time. 
7 get across first: πέραν. .. γίγνομαι. 8 were plainly; φανερός εἰμι. 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAPS. I-III 125 


of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
between the active and middle meanings. 


I. ἄνω 26. ὁμίχλη 

2. ate 27. ὄχθη 

3. ἀτριβής 28. οὐρανός 

4. ἀφίημι 29. προσμίγνυμι 
5. ὑπερβολή 30. συμμίγνυμι - 
6. ἐμβολή 31. πελάζω 

7. ἐκδύω 32. πέτρα 

ὃ. ἀποδύω 33. πέτρος 

9. δαψιλής 34. παρεγγυάω 
10. ἐλέγχω 35. πηγή 

11. ἐνεδρεύω 36. προσβάλλω 
12. ἐπίκειμαι 37. πῆχυς 

13. εὔχομαι 38. σκέλος 

14. θάπτω 39. σημαίνω 
15. κλέπτω 40. στρέφω 

16. κυλίνδω 41. σφαγιάζομαι 
17. κυκλόω 42. κατασφάττω 
18. κράτος 43. τέως 

19. κρέμαμαι 44. τηνικαῦτα 
20. λίθος 45. τρέχω 

21. λανθάνω 46. ἔπιτρέχω 
22. μνημονεύω 47. ὑπάγω 

23. νεκρός 48. ὑφηγέομαι 
24. εἴσοδος 49. ὑφίστημι 
25. ἄφοδος 50. χειμών 


310. Review the following points of syntax: 


1. Genitive of source, 16. 


2. Construction after verbs of Fearing. [H. 887: G, 1378: 


B. 594: Go. 610, 611.] 


126 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


3. Accusative of specification, or Greek Accusative. 
[H. 718: 6. 1058: B. 337: Go. 537.] 

4. Construction after λανθάνω. [Η. 984: G. 1586.) See 
169. : : 
5. Case following πελάζω. [H.772: G.1175: B. 392: Go. 525.] 

6. Verbs followed by the Genitive. [H. 742: G. 1102: B. 
356: Go. 510, 511.] 

7. Result clauses. [H.927: G. 1450: B. 595, 597: Go. 566, 4, 
619. | 
8. Construction after verbs of Hindering. [Η. 963: G. 
1549: B. 643: Go. 572-573.] 

9. Potential Optative. [H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480.] 

10. Use of participle for a relative clause, 40. 


311. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 309 and involving the constructions in 310. 
These sentences should be written by the students at sight. 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER IV 


312. Sec. I-13. 


1. Because! of the enemy, they proceeded through Ar- 
menia. 

2. We made a treaty on condition that we should take as 
much provision as we needed.? 

3. The snow was so deep ? that the men were covered. 

4. While they were scattered, they saw many fires. 


313. Sec. 14-22. 


1. Wesuffered punishment, because we burned the villages. 
2. Whatever things were not* facts, he did not report. 


1 Notice carefully the difference between διά with the Accusative and the 
Genitive. ? take... needed = take provision as much as we need. * ἄπλε- 
tos. * Η, 1025,a: G, 1612: B. 600: Go, 646. 


3. 
4. 


NO "ν᾿ 


27 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. V 127 


We asked him who would attack us.! 
We left a garrison and proceeded with the man who had 
been captured. 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER V 


314. Sec. I-II. 


We must seize the pass before they attack us. 

Many perished, because the north wind blew in their 
faces? ; 

Unless you admit us to the fire, we will not share® 
with you what we have. 

When they had eaten something, they came to the 
mayor. 


315. Sec. 12-20. 


Whoever did not have* something black as a protec- 
tion, lost their eyes.® 

We requested the sick not to be left behind. 

On account® of the steaming, we thought that the snow 
would melt. , 

They went along and found out what the hindrance 
was. 


316. Sec. 21-27. 


They sent men? to find out how the sick were.® 
Xenophon bade them distribute these villages by lot. 


lwho...us: what was the direct question? To whom does us refer? 


n... faces: ἐναντίος. ὃ. H. 737: G. 1097: B. 356: Go. 510. * Whoever 


. have = those not having: which negative? ° dost... eyes = were de- 


stroyed in respect to the eyes. ®%on... steaming: cf. διὰ τὸ ἐκλελοιπέναι, 
sec. 15 of the text. ‘Omit. 8 What tense in Greek? . 


128 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART 11 


3. The husband of the mayor’s daughter had gone to 
hunt hares. 
4. They had to! go down to their houses on a ladder. 


317. Sec. 28-36. 


1. We will deprive? him of his children until he prom- 
ises to lead us. 

2. Whenever Xenophon went by a house, they drank to 

. his health. | 

3. We asked him what the neighboring ὃ country was. 

4. Then the mayor taught us how to lead these horses 
through deep snow. 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER VI 
318. Sec. I-9. 


— 
. 


If you lead us well, we shall hand over to you your son. 
The boy who was left behind* by the mayor was carried 
home. 
3. I will stop advancing in order that we may plan how 
we shall fight.® 
4. As soon as they arm themselves, they will not delay. 


319. Sec. 10-16. 


1. We must consider how to seize the mountain without 
being seen. . 
2. If the enemy are on both sides,’ we shall be struck on 
the head. 


1 had to: use Sw. * What two constructions follow verbs of depriving? 
H. 724, 748: G. 1069, 1118: B. 340, 362: Go. 509. ὃ πλησίον. 4 who. . 
behind: see 40. ‘Show... fight: H. 885: G. 1372: B. 593: Go. 638, a. 
6 without being seen: use the participle of λανθάνω. 70) doth sides: ἔνθεν 
καὶ ἔνθεν. 


Ν 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAPS. IV-VI 129 


3. I heard that you stole whatever the law did not! pro- 
hibit. 
4. I, also, am clever at stealing.” 


320. Sec. 17-27. 


1. If we ever take any part of the mountain, they form 
ambuscades. 

2. Why must you make this agreement ?8 

The majority * joined the others before the enemy fled. 

4. We could not render their shields® useless by cutting 
them with our knives. 


a 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS IV, V, AND VI 


321. Learn the following important words which occur 
in Chapters IV, V, and VI. Memorize the principal parts 
of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
between the active and middle meanings. 


I. ἀγνοέω 11. διαλαγχάνω 
2. ἀθρόος 12. διασκηνέω 

3. ἀμέλεια 13. διαφέρω 

4. ἀπαντάω 14. διάφορος 

5. ἅπαξ 15. ἐγκαλύπτω 
6. ἄπλετος 16. ἐμπίμπρημι 
7. ἀσθενέω 17. ἔνθα 

8. βρέχω 18. ἐράω 

9. γαμέω 19. εὔζωνος 

10. δάκτυλος 20. κάμνω 


ΤΑΙ] negative relative clauses which are protases of condition use μή. 
2 at stealing: H. 952: G. 1526: B. 641: Go. 565, 2. ὅ σύνθημα. “ of 
πολλοί, 5 Not γέρρον; wicker shields. 

GK. P.OSE COMP. —9 


[30 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


21. κλέπτω 27. κωμάρχης 33. ὀψίζω 
22. κλώψ 28. μελετάω 34. owe 
23. κλοπή 29. μετρέω 35. παιδαία 
24. κρατήρ 30. νόμος 36. πάλαι 
25. κτῆνος 31. νόμιμος 37. παλαιός 
26. κνέφας 32. ὄκνος 38. παρατίθημι 

39. πνέω 45. σφάττω 

40. πνεῦμα 46. τράπεζα 

41. πήγνυι. 47. τρέπω 

42. προπίνω 48. τρέφω 

43. πῶμα 49. ἀνατρέφω 

44. πῦρ 50. ἀποσκεδάννυμι 


322. Review the following points of syntax: 


1. διά with Accusative and Genitive. 

2. Case governed by δέω. 

3. μή with the participle. [H. 1025, a: G. 1612: B. 653, 6: 
Go. 582, ¢.] 

4. Vivid future condition. 

5. Construction used with μεταδίδωμι. [H. 737: G. 1097: 
B. 356: Go. 510.] 

6. Constructions used after verbs of Depriving. [H. 724, 
748: G. 1069, 1118: B. 340, 362: Go. 509.] 

7. ὅπως with the Future Indicative. When used? 
ΓΗ. 885: G. 1372: B. 593: Go. 638, a.] 

8. Adjectives followed by the Infinitive. [H. 952: G. 1526: 
B. 641: Go. 565, a. | 

9. Present General Condition. 


323. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 821 and involving the constructions in 
322. These sentences should be written by the students 
at sight. 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. VII 1321 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER VII 
324. Sec. 1-8. 


1. Immediately, on his arrival! Xenophon said, ‘ What 
prevents us from taking? the place ?”’ 

Whenever we pass by, our legs are crushed.’ 

Should we not# suffer, while under fire ?® 

4. It will not be possible to run along one by one. 


w oN 


325. Sec. 9-17. 


1. The whole army.feared that he would be the first to 
run ® into the stronghold. 

2. He seized him by the hand’ as he ran by. 

3. We shall cut off the heads of whomever we can 
conquer. 

4. Whenever we are going to fight, 8 they follow. 


326. Sec. 18-27. 


I. It is plain that® this guide came with us to destroy the 
country. 7 

2. The shouting of those who were coming up became 
louder and nearer. 

3. We heard the men ahead shouting, “The sea, the sea!” 

4. Without the exhortation of any one,” the guide himself 
cuts the shields. 


lon his arrival = having come. 2. What... taking: see text, sec. 4. 
3 our... crushed = we are crushed in respect to our legs. * 4H. 1015, ὁ: G. 
1604: B. 573. ° while under fire = being struck. 5. be the first to run: use 
πρῶτος in agreement with the subject. 7 dy the hand: H. 738, a: G. 1100: 
B. 356: Go. 510. ® The Future Infinitive very often follows μέλλω. 9% When 
δῆλος is used impersonally, it is followed by ὅτι and the Indicative or Opta- 
tive. 10 without... any one = no one exhorting: Genitive absolute. 


[32 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART II 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER VIII 


327. Sec. I-10. 


A man who had been a slave! at Athens said, “1 should 
like to ask a questicn.” ? 


2. We have not come to do harm to the king at least. 


4. 


The Macrones said that they would give the Greeks a 
spear. | 

We must come together and plan how to fight in the 
best way. 


328. Sec. 11--10. 


If we go arranged in this way, the enemy will fall upon 
our phalanx. 

There is nothing to hinder® us from forming‘ the 
companies in column. 

If the companies are on both sides,® we shall not be cut 
off by the enemy. 

The right wing, which Cleanor led, began to sing the 
paean. , 


329. Sec. 20-28. 


As many as eat of the honeycomb will become foolish.® 

When a boy, he once killed a boy by striking him with 
a dagger. 

“This hill,” he said, “will be a very excellent place for 
wrestling.”’ 

The horsemen had to turn back at’ the sea. 


lwho...slave: see40. ask a question = ask something. * nothing 


to hinder: cf. the text, sec.14. ‘hinder... forming: H. 961, 1029: (ἃ. 
1551: B. 643: Go. 572-573. ὅ om both sides: ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν. © as many 
... foolish; what kind of a condition? 7 ἐν. 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAPS. VII-VIII 133 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS VII AND VIII 


330. Learn the following important words which occur 
in Chapters VII and VIII. Memorize the principal parts 
of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
between the active and middle meanings. 


I. ἄλκιμος 26. μεθύω 

2. ἀνιάω 27. μηχανάομαι 
3. ἀνακράζω 28. ὁρίζω 

4. ἀνακομίζω 29. ὅριον 

5. ἀναλίσκω 30. ὄρος 

6. ἀποκάμνω 31. παρατρέχω 
7. βῆμα 32. περιττεύω 
8. δασύς 33. περιττός 
9. παχύς 34. περιίστημι 
10. πυκνός 35. προίστημι 
[1. δέρμα 36. πιέζω 

12. διαλέγομαι 37. παλαίω 
13. διασπάω 38. πάλη 

14. δουλεύω 39. πυγμή 

15. ἐνέδρα 40. πτέρυξ 
16. ἑταῖρος 41. ῥίπτω 

17. Cwypéw 42. σκευή 

18. ἤδη 43. σκεῦος 

19. ἡγεμονία 44. συντρίβω 
20. ἡγεμόσυνα 45. φθείρω 
21. θέα 46. φωνή 

22. θέαμα 47. χορεύω 
23. κολωνός 48. χρήζω 

24. κυλίνδω 49. ὠμός 

25. λήζομαι 50. ὦμος 


134 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION -- PART II 


331. Review the following points of syntax: 


1. The Accusative of specification. [H. 718: 6. 1058: Β, 
337: Go. 537-] 

2. Direct Questions. [H. 1015: G. 1603, 1604: B. 570-572: Go. 
488. ] 

3. Verbs followed by the Genitive. [H. 738, 2: G. 1100: 
B. 356: Go. 510, 511. ] 

4. Vivid Future Relative Conditions, 114 and 115. 

5. δῆλος εἶμι used impersonally, 143. 

6. Construction after verbs of Hindering, etc. [H. 963: 
G. 1549: B. 643: Go. 572-573.] 

7. Redundant Negative. [H. 1029: G. 1615: B. 434: Go. 487.] 


332. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
ing the words in 330 and involving the constructions in 
331. These sentences should be written by the students 
at sight. 


PART III 


BOOK I— CHAPTER I 


333. Sec. I-2. 

When Darius was sick, the elder of his two sons was 
with him;! but the younger? was, by chance,’ in the prov- 
ince of which Darius had made him satrap. Accordingly 
the king sent for him, and he marched inland with three 
hundred heavy armed Greek soldiers. 


334. Sec. 3-6. 

On the death of Darius,* Artaxerxes, his elder son, 
ascended the throne, and arrested his brother, Cyrus, on 
the ground that® he was plotting against him. Cyrus, 
however, was begged off by his mother and sent back to 
his province. There he planned to make war on his 
brother,® and he treated all who were with him’ in such 
a way that they were well disposed toward him.® 


335. Sec. 7-8. 
Cyrus secretly® plotted against his brother in the follow- 
ing way: He took the fugitives of Miletus under his protec- 


lwas with him: πάρειμι. 2. With what word is this contrasted? The 
use of μέν and δέ indicates the contrast. % was by chance = chanced to be; 


see 169. * Ox... Darius = when Darius died. ὃ on the ground that: ὡς. 
6 Dative. ‘with him: wap ἑαυτῴί. 8 such... him. see 157 and 158. 
9 See 169. 


135 


136 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


tion, and besieged! the city both by land and sea, in order 
that he might find many pretexts? for collecting troops. 


886. Sec. 9-11. 


508 the king did not notice that Cyrus was plotting 3 
against him, because he thought that he was at war with 
Tissaphernes, and because he sent to him the taxes that 
accrued® from the cities. Cyrus also gave to Clearchus, 
who was his guest, ten thousand darics for the support of 
his soldiers. In this way an army was maintained with- 
out attracting attention.® 


BOOK I—CHAPTER II 


337. Sec. 1-4. 


The Greek generals obeyed the call of Cyrus,’ because 
he promised that he would not stop until they should 
arrive® among the Pisidians. Therefore they assembled 
as many soldiers as they could. When Tissaphernes, 
however, perceived this preparation, he went to the king 
as quickly as he could in order that he might make 
preparations in turn.? 


338. Sec. 5-9. 


On setting out from Sardis, Cyrus marched to the 
large city of Celaenae." Whenever the king was in the 


1 took... and besieged = having taken, besieged. % See the text at the 
end of sec. 7. ὃ ὥστε. 4 that... plotting: H. 982: G. 1588: B. 661: Go, 
586. that accrued: see 40.— accrued: γίγνομαι. 6 without... atten- 
tion: see 169. 7 the call of Cyrus = Cyrus’ calling. ὃ until... arrive: 
see 128. 59 771 turn: what preposition expresses this idea? 10 On setting 
out. do not follow this use of the present participle in English. The Greeks 
were more accurate in their use of the tenses than the English are. Did he 
set out before he marched? 1 Do not use the Genitive, 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. II 137 


park of this city, he used to hunt wild beasts on horse- 
back.! The Marsyas river, which empties into the Maean- 

der, is twenty feet? wide? There Xerxes, after his defeat 
in Greece,was said to have built a palace at the sources of 
the river. 


339. Sec. 10-14. 


When he was at Cayster-plain, the soldiers kept coming 
to Cyrus to demand* the pay which was due them®; but 
Cyrus was evidently ® troubled because he had no money 
to give them. The Cilician queen, however,’ at that time, 
gave Cyrus a large amount of money in order that he 


might pay the army. When Cyrus reached ayer he 
remained ten days. 


340. Sec. 15-18. 


At the request of the Cilician queen,® Cyrus reviewed 
his whole? army. As the Greeks were marching past, 
Cyrus ordered them to advance arms”; and when the 
trumpet sounded, they advanced arms and moved for- 
ward on the run toward the barbarians. On this account, 
the barbarians were greatly alarmed, and Epyaxa herself 
fled in her carriage. 


341. Sec. 19-22. 


While they were marching through Cappadocia, Cyrus 
was said to have killed a man. Syennesis, the king of 


1 on horseback = from horse. 2. Genitive of measure. 38.272 width. 4 20 
demand; review the ways of expressing purpose. See 79. ὅ which... them: 
this idea is expressed by ἀπό in composition with the verb meaning 20 demand. 
6 See 143. 786 8 At... gucen.: use the Genitive absolute. 9% H. 672: 
G. 979: B. 455. 1° advance arms: προβάλλομαι τὰ ὅπλα. 


138 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


Cilicia, tried to prevent Cyrus from entering! his country 
by guarding? the pass over the mountains. But when a 
messenger came and said that Menon was already inside 
of the mountains, the king abandoned the pass, and Cyrus 
proceeded without hindrance.’ 


342. Sec. 23-27. 


Some‘ say that these soldiers perished among the moun- 
tains at the hands of ὃ the Cilicians, while others* say that 
they could not find the road. Afterwards,® when Cyrus 
had entered Tarsus and met Syennesis, he gave him many 
valuable gifts, while’ he, on the other hand,’ gave Cyrus 
a large sum of money. The Greeks said that they would 
not take the slaves, if they ever came across any.® 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 


343. Follow the directions given in 182-184. 
The sight work should be connected prose. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER III 
344. Sec. I-6. 


Cyrus was compelled to remain here many days,” for 
his soldiers would not go against the king. When Clear- 
chus could not force his soldiers to advance, he addressed 
them as follows: ‘“Fellow-soldiers, do not wonder that 
I wish to aid Cyrus for the benefits I have received at his 


‘1 from entering: H. 963: G. 1549: B. 643: Go. 572, 573. 23 dy guard- 
ing. use the participle. *% without hindrance = no one hindering. * some 
... others: oi μέν... οἱ 8€, 5 at the hands of : Genitive with ὑπό. ὃ After 
this. Ἰδέ. ®on...hand: omit. 9.27... ἄρ. 566 111 δηὰ 149, 1° manydays: 
what kind of time is expressed? do... wonder. for prohibitions, see 62. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. III 139 


hands! On the other hand, I do not wish to desert you, 
for I know that, if I should be deprived? of you, I should 
_ not be able to ward off an enemy.” 


345. Sec. 7-12. 


The soldiers commended the decision? of Clearchus 
when he said that he would not desert them. On account 
of this, Cyrus thought that he had been wronged # by the 
Greeks, and, accordingly, they feared that® he would 
inflict punishment on them. Clearchus told them that 
Cyrus was a very bitter enemy, as well as® a valuable 
friend. 


346. Sec. 13-16. 

“41 propose,” said one of the soldiers, “that we sail 
away,’ if Cyrus will give us boats. But if not,’ let us 
ask him for guides so that we may seize the heights before 
the Cilicians.”® After him, Clearchus stood up and said 
that he knew how to be ruled also,” and that he would 
obey whatever man they chose to be general." 


347. Sec. 17-21. 


The Greeks did not think it best to ask Cyrus for 
boats, for they would hesitate * to embark in the boats 
which he might give. ‘We will send messengers,” they 


1 for... hands : see text, last part of sec.4. 227... deprived: H. 969, 4: 
G. 1563,5: B. 653, 6: Go. 583. ὃ γνώμη. * had been wronged: the direct 
form of the thought was 7 have been wronged. ὅ H. 887: G. 1378: B. 594: 
Go. 610, 611. δ as well as: τὲ καί, 7 propose... away. εἶπον followed by 
the Infinitive. 8 8εε 96. seize... Cilicians: see 169. 10 καί before 
the word it emphasizes. 11 would... general: what was the direct form of 
the condition? 12 ¢hink it best: δοκέω and Dative. 1} for boats: H. 724: 
G. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535. 14 Notice the two meanings of oxvéw as given in 
the vocabulary, and the construction used in each case. 


[40 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART IIl 


said, “to ask him if this expedition is more dangerous 
than the former one.” Cyrus replied to the delegates 
that he wished to inflict punishment on Abrocomas, a per- 
sonal enemy of his, who was! at the Euphrates river. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER IV 


348. Sec. I-5. 


While Cyrus was staying at Issus, thirty-five ships that 
he had sent for arrived. From there they march for 
one day to the pass from Cilicia into Syria.2 By landing? 
troops inside and outside the walls, Cyrus overpowered 
the enemy and took the pass. When Abrocomas heard 
that Cyrus was coming‘ against him, he retreated to the 
king. 

349. Sec. 6-10. 


At Myriandus, two generals placed their most valuable ® 
goods on a boat, and sailed away. Some® expressed the 
wish that Cyrus would capture them, while ® others thought 
that he would not pursue them. Cyrus said to his troops, 
“JT, at least,’ will not capture their boat, lest some one 
might say that I rob® of their property whoever wishes to 
go away.” 


350. Sec. II-14. 

After this episode,? Cyrus marched on to the Euphrates 
river, which was twenty-four plethra wide. When the 
soldiers heard that the march would be to Babylon, they 

1 who was: see 40. 2 from... Syria =of Cilicia and Syria. ὃ By 
landing: H. 969, a: G. 1563, 3: B. 653, 2: Go. 583. 4 was coming: see 
142. ° most valuable: πλείστου ἄξια. 6. Some... while others: οἱ μέν... 
οἱ δέ. 7 /, at least: ἔγωγε. 8 H. 724: G. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535. 9 Omit. 
10 which was: do not use a relative clause. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. V I4I 


said that they would not go.t_ Cyrus, however, persuaded 
the greater part of the Greek army to follow, by promising 
to give to each mana large amount of money until they 
reached? Babylon. 


951. Sec. 15-19. 


Menon wished to persuade his men to cross the river 
before® the rest of the soldiers decided what they would 
do. “For,” said he, “if you begin to cross, Cyrus will 
honor you above the rest.” Cyrus was pleased with 
Menon and his soldiers,* and he said that he would take 
care® that® they praise him. It is said that this river 
receded before Cyrus. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III AND IV 


352. Follow the directions given in 195-197. 
_ The sight work should be connected prose. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER V 
353. Sec. I-4. 


While they were marching through Arabia, they hunted 
wild animals of all sorts on horseback. Whenever they 
gave chase’ to the wild asses, these ran so much faster ® 
than the horses that they could not capture them. After 
they remained at Corsote for three days, they marched to 
Pylae, keeping 9 the Euphrates on their right. 


1 they... go: the Greek expression is did not say that they would go. 
2 until... reached: what was the form of the promise in Cyrus’ words? See 
128. ὃ πρίν: see 128. *Do not use the word for soldier at all. Express 
in another way. 5 ¢ake care: this verb is impersonal in Greek. 6 H. 885: 
G. 1372: B. 593: Go. 638,a. ‘whenever... chase: see109. 8.0 much 
faster = faster by so much. 5. having. 


Here the soldiefs ate meat, because grain was very 
scarce. On one ‘eccasion,! when a narrow place ap- 
peared,” one couldsee® a sample* of Cyrus’ discipline. 
At the ς and of Cyrus,® his noblest attendants 
stripped off their tunics, jumped into the mud, and 
helped hasten on the wagons. 


855. Sec. 9-11. 


Cyrus did hot delay, except® where it was necessary to 
_ provide himself with provisions, for he evidently” wished | 
to fight the king when he was® unprepared. Besides,?® 
Cyrus knew that the king’s country was weak in the 
scattered condition of his troops. The soldiers obtained 
provisions from a city named Charmande by crossing the 
river on skins. _, 


y 856. Sec. 12-17. 


One of Menon’s soldiers said that he had been beaten 
by Clearchus; therefore, on the same"! day, when Clear- 
chus was riding by,” they threw stones at him. When 
Cyrus learned of the affair, he rode between the two 
armies, and told the Greeks that, if they engaged in any 
conflict with one another, they would be 18 cut to pieces by 
the barbarians. 


10On... occasion: wort. 2 when... appeared: Genitive absolute. ὃ. one 
could see = it was possible to see. 4 μέρος, τό. ὅ At... Cyrus: Genitive 
absolute. 9 except where: ὅπου ph. ™See 148. 8 Omit when he was. 
%ér. = Win... troops: notice the text at the end of sec.9. See 46. 


12 when... by: use participle. 18 ¢f,.. δὲ: Cyrus said, if you engage... 
you will be, etc. | 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. VII 143 


BOOK I— CHAPTER VI 
357. Sec. I-5. 


Orontas, a man who had formerly been at war! with 
Cyrus, said to him, “If you give me a thousand horsemen, 
I will kill these horsemen, and prevent them from? carry- 
ing the news? to the king.’”’ But Orontas was planning 
to go to the king. When Cyrus heard of this, he arrested 
Orontas. 


A 


358. Sec. 6-11. 


At the trial, Orontas said that he had never been 
wronged by Cyrus. Cyrus then said, “ Did you not# 
revolt to the Mysians after you gave® me pledges?”’ 
Orontas assented. When Clearchus advised that they 
put him out of the way as quickly as possible, all the 
rest assented to this opinion. After this, no one ever saw 
Orontas either dead or alive. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS V AND VI 


959. Follow the directions given in 205-207. 
The sight work should be connected prose. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER VII 
360. Sec. I-5. 


After Cyrus had reviewed § the whole army, he collected 
the general and captains of the Greeks, and told them that 
he led them as allies because he thought’ that they were 

la...war.see 40. 2H. 963: G. 1549: B. 643: Go. 572, 573. 3 car- 
rying the news: express by one verb. 4 Did you not: οὐκοῦν. Like nonne 


in Latin. ‘after you gave: Aorist participle. 6 madeareview. 1 because 


he thought: H. 969, ὁ: Ὁ. 1563, 2: B. 653, 4: Go. 583. 


144 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


braver than the barbarians. He showed them into what 
sort of a contest they were going, and said he would make 
them the envy of their friends at home, if his enterprise 
was successful.! 


361. Sec. 6--11. 


Gaulites, who happened to be present, said that Cyrus 
would not be able to fulfill his promises,” even if he should 
remember? them. When the Greeks asked Cyrus what 
they should have,* if they conquered, he said that he 
would give to each man a golden crown. Artagerses was 
said to be the leader of the king’s horsemen. 


362. Sec. 12-20. 


Cyrus thought that the king would not fight on that 
day, because he learned that many tracks of men, who 
were retreating, were visible. Ten days before this,° Sila- 
nus said that the king would not fight within ten days, so 
Cyrus promised him a large amount of® money in case he 
should prove to speak’ the truth. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER VIII 


363. Sec. 1-7. 


While all were proceeding rather carelessly, Pategyas 
rode up at full speed and shouted that the king would 
immediately attack them with a large army. Thereupon 
the generals and soldiers armed themselves in all haste, 


lif... successful: use the Genitive absolute. See text at end of sec. 4. 
2 his promises = as many things as he promised. * Notice that the Perfect 
middle of μιμνήσκω has a present meaning. 4 what they should have = what 
should be to them: Dative of possession. ὅ Ten... this = on the eleventh day 
from that day. 5 large amount of: πολλά. ‘in... truth: what was the 
promise in the direct form? — prove to speak: Aorist. 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. VIII 145 


and took! their positions,? each in his appointed place. 
Clearchus occupied® the right wing, near* the Euphrates 
river. 


364. Sec. 8-13. 


In the afternoon, the whole Persian army came into 
sight. In front of the lines the Greeks saw some chariots 
that had scythes for the purpose of cutting whomever they 
came in contact with. Although Clearchus was ordered ® 
to lead against the center of the enemy, yet he did not 
obey, because he feared‘ that he would be cut off from 
the river. 


365. Sec. 14-21. 


When Cyrus heard from Xenophon® what the watch- 
word was,® the Greeks sang the pzan, and went against 
the enemy. But the barbarians were frightened out of 
their wits, and fled before they suffered any injury. 
Whenever” the chariots were borne through the Greeks, 
they opened ranks. 


366. Sec. 22-209. 


Cyrus, fearing that the king would surround him and 
cut his men to pieces, rode against the men in front of the 
king. There Cyrus received a wound under the eye and 
was killed. This defeat occurred! because Cyrus did not 
restrain himself,’ and because Clearchus did not himself 
lead against the king. 


larmed...and took = having armed... took. 3 took their positions: 

καθίστημι. ὃ held. 4 Dative with πρός. ‘came... with: ἐντυγχάνω. 

ὁ Although ... ordered: H. 969, 6: G. 1563, 6: B. 653, 7: Go. 583. 7 de- 

cause he feared. participle. ὃ Genitive of source. % Ihe direct question 

was Whatis, etc. See 109. 1! γίγνομαι. 12 restrain himself: ἀνέχομαι. 
GK. PROSE COMP. — IO 


146 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART ΠῚ 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS VII AND VIII 


367. Follow the instructions given in 217-219. 
The sight work should be connected prose. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER IX 
368. Sec. I-7. 


Cyrus was educated at the king’s court, with the sons of 
the nobles. There, all who were personally acquainted! 
with him agreed that he was the best of all in everything, 
and that he knew how to? rule and obey. While he was 
satrap of Lydia and Phrygia, everybody had confidence in 
him, because he never broke his WOR, ° if he promised any 
one anything. 


369. Sec. 8-15. 


Cyrus evidently * showed that he would not betray the 
fugitives of Miletus, therefore very many cities prayed 
that they might intrust even® their lives to him. Now,® 
he always had a large supply of brave men, for wherever ‘ 
Cyrus appeared, very many were willing to incur danger 
and go on expeditions with him. 


370. Sec. 16-23. 


He regarded it of the utmost importance® to take 
nothing away from those who brought in® large revenues 
from the countries which”. they ruled. Furthermore," 


l were... acquainted: ἐν πείρᾳ γίγνομαι. 2 knew how to: H. 986: 6, 
1592, 2: B, 661, n. 3: Go. 588,¢. *%broke his word: ψεύδομαι. * See 148. 
δ καί, What position? 6 δή. 7See 109. ὃ regarded... importance : 
περὶ πλείστου ποιέίω. 59 broughtin: ποιέω, 10 See 37. 1 ἔτι, 


ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. X 147 


whatever gifts he received he distributed among his 
friends, and he was a most excellent co-worker with 
them in whatever they wished to accomplish. 


371. Sec. 24-31. 


I, at least, think! that it is remarkable that he looked 
after his friends so carefully.2 For this reason he had 
very many true friends. Even all the nobles who were 
with him in battle were killed while fighting in his behalf. 
Such a man, then,® was Cyrus the Younger. 


BOOK I—CHAPTER X 


372. Sec. 1-6. 


After the battle, the king’s soldiers plundered* the camp 
of Cyrus and fell upon the camp of the Greeks, where all 
who chanced to have arms made a stand. The Greeks, 
on the other hand,® conquered their opponents and went ® 
ahead in pursuit. 


373. Sec. 7-11. | 


Now’ Tissaphernes had the worst of it® in the first 
encounter, for the Greeks, under the command of Epis- 
thenes,? opened up their ranks and shot at him as he was 
charging through. When the Greeks saw that the king 
was coming up from the rear, they wheeled about and 
attacked him. 


17...think: δοκέω used impersonally and Dative. 250... carefully: 
οὕτως. ὃδή. +4 plundered... and fell=having plundered... fell. * on 
... hand: ἀλλά. ὁ εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν. 1 δή. 8 had... it: see the text at 
the beginning of sec. 8. 9 under... Episthenes: Genitive absolute. 


148 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


374. Sec. 12-19. 


The Persians, however, fled in different! directions when 
they saw that the Greeks were advancing. After this 
encounter, the Greeks halted at the foot of a certain hill, 
and wondered whether Cyrus was dead or? had gone in 
pursuit. After deliberation, they decided to go to their 
camp, where they found that everything had been plun- 
dered. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS IX AND X 


875. Follow the directions given in 228-230. 
The sight work should be connected prose. 


BOOK II—CHAPTER I 
376. Sec. I-5. 


The Greeks were grieved when they heard from Procles 
that Cyrus was dead, and that Ariaeus would go away 
towards? Ionia on the next day. Clearchus said, ‘“‘ Would 
that Cyrus had not been killed.* If he were alive, we 
would put him on the throne,°® for victors have the privi- 
lege of ruling.” ® 


377. Sec. 6-10. 


After this, the Greeks went ahead and ate the flesh of 
some’ oxen, using the arrows of the enemy for fuel.® 
While Clearchus was sacrificing, a herald from the king 


lin different directions: ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν. 2 πότερον... ἤ. ὃ ἐπί with 
the Genitive. 4 Would... killed: express this in two ways. See 2. ὅ 77 
... throne: see95. ὁ victors... ruling + see the text at the end of sec. 4. 
7 This may be omitted or expressed. ®In apposition with arrows. What 
case? 


ANABASIS BOOK .Ii, CHAP, II 149 


came and told the Greeks to surrender their arms. 
Proxenus replied, ‘“ Well,! if the king has conquered us, 
let him come and take? our arms, or tell us what we shall 
have, if we obey him.” 


378. Sec. 11-16. 


In reply to® these words,* the herald, whose name was 
Phalinus,®> said that the Greeks belonged to the king, 
because he could lead against them a large number of 
troops, and that they were foolish, if they thought they 
could use their valor and conquer the king. Therefore 
many of the Greeks began to lose ® courage. 


379. Sec. 17-23. 


Clearchus, wishing that Phalinus would advise them not 
to surrender their arms, said, “‘ Tell us, Phalinus, what we 
ought to do.” But he replied that they did not have one 
hope in ten thousand of saving themselves without the 
consent of the king.’ Clearchus, however, said that they 
would not surrender their arms, for they would be more 
valuable ὃ friends with them than without ® them. 


BOOK II—CHAPTER II 
380. Sec. 1-6. 


_ Ariaeus urged the Greeks to go back home with him 
on the next day. After he had sacrificed, Clearchus said 


1 ἀλλά. 2 κέ... take = having come, let him take: see 60. ὃ In reply 


to: πρός with the Accusative. 4 Omit. ° whose... Phalinus = Phalinus 
in respect toname. ὃ. began to lose: Imperfect. 7 without... king: Geni- 
tive absolute. 8 more valuable: πλείονος ἄξιοι. 5 with... without = 


having them than not having them: Fi. 969, α΄: G. 1563, 5: B. 653: Go. 583. 
What is the negative in conditions? 


150 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


to the generals, ‘“The omens are not favorable for us 
to go to the king, and we cannot remain here, because 
we have no provisions, therefore we must! go immedi- 
ately to our friends.’’ Henceforth the Greeks obeyed 
Clearchus. 


381. Sec. 7-13. 


About midnight, Ariaeus and the Greeks came together 
and took an oath that they would not? betray each other. 
Ariaeus thought that they ought not to go back by the 
road? they came, for fear that* they would not have pro- 
visions. Therefore they decided to go by a longer route,? 
so that they might not perish from hunger. 


382. Sec. 14-21. 


The Greeks did not wish to attack these horsemen, but 
they led straight on and arrived at sunset at villages, which 
had been plundered® by the king’s army. There the 
Greeks made such a noise that the enemy actually fled® 
from their tents. Clearchus, however, was afraid that a 
panic would fall upon the Greeks also’ within that night. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 


383. Follow the instructions given in 240-242. 
The sight work should, be connected prose. 


1 For the different ways of expressing must, see '74. 2See 141. ὃ dy the 
road, by a longer route: H. 715, ὁ: G. 1057: B. 331: Go. 536. * for fear 
that: μή. * that... plundered: see 40. % that... fled: for the distinction 
between ὥστε with the Indicative and with the Infinitive, see H. 927: G. 
1450: B. 595: Go. 566, ὁ, 639,¢. ἴ καί, In what position? 


ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. III 51 


BOOK II— CHAPTER III 
384. Sec. 1-9. 


At sunrise, some heralds came to the pickets and asked 
for Clearchus. He replied, “ Wait until I am at leisure,? 
and tell them that we shall not talk about a truce unless 
they furnish breakfast.” The messengers said that they 
would furnish the Greeks with provisions, in case there 
was a truce. After consultation, the generals decided? 
not to hesitate to make the treaty. 


385. Sec. 10-16. 


As they marched along, they came upon canals, over 
which they had to build? bridges. Clearchus beat those who 
loitered, in order that he might hurry on the work, for he 
thought that the king was trying to hinder the Greeks by let- 
ting* the water into the plain. In the villages, they found 
dates of such wonderful flavor ® that the soldiers ate them. 


386. Sec. 17-22. 


Tissaphernes said to the Greeks, through an interpreter, 
that he would ask the king that they might be carried 
safely ® into Greece, “and I think,” said he, “that he will 
grant me this as a favor,’ because I was the first to report 
that Cyrus was plotting against him.” Clearchus replied 
that they were ashamed to desert Cyrus, now that they 
had marched inland 8 with him. 


1 Wait... leisure: see 128. % Use δοκέω impersonally. % had to build: 
see 74. 4 dy letting: participle. ° wonderful flavor = wonderful because 
of thetr flavor: H. 744, 753: G. 1126, 1140: B. 366: Go. 509, c © δὲ 
carried safely: ἀποσῴζω. ' grantasa favor: χαρίζομαι. ὃ now... in- 
land: participle. 


152 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


387. Sec. 23-29. 


The Greeks said that they did not wish to kill the king, 
but would like! to proceed home. On the next day,? Tis- 
saphernes came and said, “We will furnish you with 
provisions, if you will give us pledges; you will have to 
swear further that you will buy food, whenever we cannot 
provide a market.”’ 


BOOK II—CHAPTER IV 
388. Sec. 1-6. 


While the Greeks and Ariaeus were encamped near 
each other, the Greeks were evidently? not pleased with 
the soldiers*.of Ariaeus. They said to their generals, 
“Let us not wait here until we perish.” Clearchus, how- 
ever, replied that, if they should go away then, they would 
have no provisions, nor would they be able to cross the 
Euphrates. 


389. Sec. 7-14. 


“Tf the king,” said Clearchus, “had desired to destroy 
us, I do not think that he would have broken his oath.” 
After this, as Tissaphernes led them,’ the Greeks en- 
camped by themselves, because the barbarians and the 
Greeks suspected each other. As they passed through 
the country, they arrived at a canal that was® fifteen para- 
sangs long. 


1 ἐθέλω. 7 On... day. express in two ways. *%See 143. 4 Do not 
use the word στρατιώτης. as... them. Genitive absolute. ὁ that was: 
see 40. 


ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. V 153 


390. Sec. 15-22. 


When Xenophon happened to be in front of the pickets, 
aman came up and said that Ariaeus bade them send a 
guard to the bridge, in order that the barbarians might 
not destroy the bridges and attack them. Then, indeed,! 
the Greeks knew that he had been sent underhandedly,? 
for Tissaphernes could not flee if® the bridge was de- 
stroyed. 


391. Sec. 23-28. 


When the Greeks learned what sort of* country there 
was between the river and the canal, they were not fright- 
ened, for they thought that the barbarians would not wish 
them to destroy the bridge and remain. 

At the river Physeus the Greeks met the illegitimate 
brother of the king, who halted® his army as the Greeks 
went by. He was astonished as he saw them. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III AND IV 


392. Follow the directions given in 252-254. 
The sight work should be connected prose. 


BOOK II—CHAPTER V 
393. Sec. I-10. 


When they reached the Zapatas river, Clearchus and 
Tissaphernes had a conference. Clearchus said, “We 


1 Then, indeed: ἔνθα δή. 7 sent underhandedly: ὑπόπεμπτοςς. 8 Do 
not use el. How else may a condition be expressed? ‘4 what sort of. for 
the interrogative of quality, see 34. ὅ Distinguish between the transitive and 
intransitive meanings of the different tenses. 6 had a conference; els λόγους 
ἔρχομαι (Dative). 


[54 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


must put a stop to these suspicious feelings before we 
inflict incurable evils on each other.! The Greeks will 
not violate their oaths, nor will they kill you, Tissa- 
phernes, our greatest benefactor, for we should be fool- 
ish if we should do so.” 


394. Sec. 11-17. 


“Since you have both Cyrus’ domain and the king’s 
troops, who is so foolish as not to desire to become your 
ally*? But we also, Tissaphernes, can help you in many 
ways. If the Egyptians should trouble you, I think that 
you could punish® them by using us as your allies. This 
being so,* who has persuaded you that we distrust you?” 


395. Sec. 18-24. 


Tissaphernes said in reply that the Greeks did not 
justly distrust either him or the king; for they could 
easily destroy the Greeks by seizing® the mountains before- 
hand and burning the crops. He furthermore asserted 
that he would be foolish if he should perjure himself, for - 
perjury was characteristic of® men in difficulty. “Who 
are the ones,” said he, “‘ who’ are trying to slander me?”’ 


396. Sec. 25-33. 


Clearchus urged the rest to go to Tissaphernes with 
him, so that the slanderers might be detected and pun- 
ished. He evidently ® suspected that Menon was the one 


1 on each other: H. 725,a: G. 1073: B. 340: Go. 534) δ... *%who... 
ally? see 159. * think... punish. if the Infinitive with av depends upon 
οἶμαι, the ἄν is placed near οἶμαι. 4 Genitive absolute; see text, sec. 12. 
5 by seizing: participle. 6 characteristic of: see text, at beginning of sec. 21. 
7 the ones who: see 40. 8 See 148. 


ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. VI 155 


who was plotting against the Greeks. Although many of 
the soldiers did not trust Tissaphernes,! nevertheless five 
generals and twenty captains went with Clearchus. These 
generals were arrested, and most of the captains were 
killed. 


397. Sec. 34-42. 


After this, messengers from the king came and demanded 
of the Greeks? their arms, on the ground that they were 
his.2 Cleanor said to Ariaeus that he was the basest of 
men, because he had betrayed the very * men to whom he 
had sworn to bea friend. Xenophon asked Ariaeus? for 
Proxenus and Menon, because they were friendly to both 
parties.® 


BOOK II—CHAPTER VI 
398. Sec. I-5. 


Of these generals who were captured and beheaded, 
Clearchus was the most fond of war. While he was at 
war with the Thracians, who were plundering the Greeks, 
he did not obey the order of the Ephors® to come back. 
Accordingly he was condemned to death. After this, he 
collected an army with the money which Cyrus had given 
him, and waged war against the Thracians until’ Cyrus 
sent for him. 


399. Sec. 6-15. 


I think that the man who spends money on war, when 
he can choose peace, is very fond of danger. Further- 


i Although ... Tissaphernes: Genitive absolute. 2? H. 724: G. 1069: 
B. 340: Go. 535. %0n... his=as being of himself. 4 αὐτός. ὅ Omit. 
6 order... Ephors = the Ephors ordering him.  * See 128. 


156 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART ΠῚ 


more,! Clearchus used to punish his soldiers so severely 
that they thought that they must obey” him. Whenever 
they were out of danger, his soldiers went over to another 
general, but when dangers came they repented, for their 
fear of him? made them brave soldiers. 


400. Sec. 16-20. 


Proxenus was a just and honorable man,* but he was 
not a good general,* because he could not impress on his 
troops respect for himself. He thought, as it seemed,° 
that his-soldiers would obey him, if he did not praise the 
disobedient. The soldiers used to fear Clearchus more 
than they did Proxenus. At his death, Proxenus was 
about thirty years old. 


401. Sec. 21-30. 


Menon® wished to become very rich and powerful. 
Therefore he thought that he must commit perjury and 
deceive his friends, in order to carry out? his desires.§ 
He used to think that it was an easy matter to take the 
possessions of his friends, because they would be off their 
guard. He always used to fear those who he thought 
were rascals. This base man was not beheaded as the 
rest were, but was tortured to death. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS V AND VI 


402. Follow the instructions given in 264-266. 
The sight work should be connected prose. 


lad. 2 must obey: H. 988-992: G. 1594-1599: B. 663-666: Go. 352-354. 
8 their... him. use the article and the Infinitive. 4 just man; good general: 
show that these two expressions are contrasted. ° as it seemed. see 148, 
6 Notice in the text the use of δέ at the beginning of each of the character 
sketches. ‘22...o0u¢: ἐπὶ τό and the Infinitive. ® Do not use a noun. 


ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP, I . 157 


BOOK III— CHAPTER I 
7403. Sec. 1-5. 


After the death of the generals, the Greeks did not go to 
sleep, for they thought that, inasmuch as they had no 
cavalry, no one would be left, if they should prove victo- 
rious. Now it happened that Xenophon, the Athenian, 
was with the army at the invitation of Proxenus.! He 
was a friend of Socrates, the philosopher,? who advised 
him to consult the god at Delphi with reference to the 
journey. 7 


404. Sec. 6-13. 


Xenophon decided that he ought to go with Proxenus, 
so he asked Apollo to what gods he must sacrifice, if he 
wished to get home safely. When he was introduced to 
Cyrus, and was on his march inland,’ he was ashamed to 
go back, after he had discovered that Cyrus wished to con- 
quer the king. During a thunderstorm, he thought that 
he saw a vision. 


, 


/405. Sec. 14-20. 


For a long time he lay thinking what sort of dream it 
was; then he called the captains of Proxenus together, 
and said that he could not sleep when he saw that the 
Greeks were not making preparations against the king. 
“For,” said he, “if we get into the hands* of the king 
to-day, will he not resort to every means to kill® us? I 


lat... Proxenus. express this idea by the use of the participle. 2 φιλό- 
σοφος. %on... inland: use one word. * = power. ὅ 20 kill: as and 
the Subjunctive or Optative. Which? 


158 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


fear the truce, because we must get all of our provisions 
by purchase.” 


406. Sec. 21-29. 


‘In this struggle,” said he, “the gods, in all likelihood, 
would be on our side; let us therefore show! ourselves 
very brave generals and captains. For my part,” I will 
follow or lead, just as you choose.’ Apollonides, how- 
ever, said he talked foolishness. Xenophon said in reply, 
“Do you® not remember! that our generals were beaten by 
the Persians?’ 


407. Sec. 30-35. 


The Gieeks accordingly took away the captaincy from 
Apollonides,* because they saw that both of his ears had 
been bored, and because they thought he was a disgrace to 
all Greece. Then Hieronumos urged Xenophon to tell the 
others just what he had also told them. Xenophon replied 
that they at least must never get into the power of the enemy. 


408. Sec. 36-41. 


“You ought not,” said he, “to be discouraged, but you 
ought to be making preparations to meet the enemy, so 
that the soldiers may imitate you. And in the first place, 
since nothing can be done without generals, let us appoint 
generals and captains in place of those who have been lost. 
Know well that we can not use our soldiers for any pur- 


1 Compare the active and middle meaning of these verbs. 2 For my part: 
these words merely emphasize the 7. % Do you not, etc.: H. 1015: G, 1603: 
B. 570-572: Go. 488. 4H. 724: G. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535. 5 doth... 
bored = had been bored in respect to both ears. 


ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. II i59 


pose,! if they are dejected, and think only of what they 
are to suffer.” ? 


409. Sec. 42-47. 


Xenophon told the Greeks that he noticed that men who 
strove to die nobly generally ὃ passed their lives in happi- 
ness. “Let us, therefore,” said he, ‘since men are the 
ones who win victories, be brave men ourselves, and urge 
the others on to bravery.” Then Chirisophus praised the 
words and deeds of Xenophon,® and urged them not to 
delay, but to choose commanders at once. Xenophon 
was elected in place of Proxenus. 


BOOK IIJI— CHAPTER II 
410. Sec. 1-6. 


After the election® of the generals, Chirisophus ad- 
dressed them as follows: “ Although Ariaeus has betrayed 
us, nevertheless we must not give in, but try not to get into 
the power of the enemy alive.’’ Cleanor then said, ‘‘ Would 
that the gods had punished’ Tissaphernes before ® he had 
done harm to our generals. But since we understand his 
faithlessness, let us never again be deceived by him.” 


411. Sec. 7-13. 


Then Xenophon arose, splendidly equipped for war, and 
said that now he hoped that they could punish® the 
enemy. Just! then some one sneezed; and the soldiers 


1 for any purpose: τὶ. 2 they... suffer: future tense. 8. ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ. 
4 ποιέω. ° the words... Xenophon = praised Xenophon for what he said and 
did. ®Donotuseanoun. 14 Would... punished: what kind of a wish is 
this? See 76. ®See 128. 5 δίκην ἐπιτίθημι. 0 δή: post-positive. 


160 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


vowed to offer sacrifices to Zeus, because they thought 
this a good omen. After this incident,! Xenophon re. 
minded them of the valor of their ancestors, and of how 
many Persians they killed when Xerxes came against 
Athens with his countless host. 


412. Sec. 14-19. 


If you formerly dared to go-against the Persians for? 
Cyrus, now, surely, you will be more courageous for? 
your own safety. Do not think® that you are worse off 
because you see that Ariaeus and his men are in the 
ranks of the enemy. Furthermore,* you should not be 
discouraged because you have no cavalry, for when you 
are on the ground you can hit much better whomever you 
wish. 


413. Sec. 20~25. 


Xenophon told the Greeks that it was far better to take 
men and compel them to lead than to use Tissaphernes as 
a guide, and that all rivers were passable at their sources. 
“T say,” said he, “that the king would give you many 
guides, if he saw that you were making preparations to 
settle hereabouts. But if you remain, do not live® in 
abundance or forget the way ® home.” 


414, Sec. 26—32.. 


“T think it best,” said Xenophon, “to burn up the super- 
fluous baggage and try to conquer the enemy, so that they 
may be our baggage-carriers. The most important point,’ 


»". 


1QOmit. 2 περί with the Genitive. ὃ. Do-not think: see 62. 4 πρὸς δ᾽ 
ἔτι. 5 do not live: see 62. 6 H. 742: G. 1102: B. 356: Go. 511. 7 Zhe 
. + point: τὸ μέγιστον. 


ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. II 161 


however, is for us to be more orderly and obedient than 
formerly, and to help the commander punish the disobe- 
dient. In this way the king will be disappointed, if we 
allow! no one to be a coward.” 


415. Sec. 33-30. 


After all had voted to do what Xenophon had proposed, 
Xenophon again spoke: “It is plain that the enemy will 
follow us like cowardly dogs; therefore, let us form the 
hoplites in a hollow square? and appoint commanders for 
the van,® flanks, and rear, so that we should not have to4 
arrange the men in case the enemy should attack us.” 
They decided that Xenophon should guard the rear, for 
the present. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 


416. Follow the directions given in 281-283. 
The sight work should be connected prose. 


BOOK III— CHAPTER III 
417. Sec. I-10. 


Before the Greeks burned up the superfluous baggage, 
they shared with one another what they needed. Then 
Mithridates came up in the guise of® a friend and tried to 
bribe some of the captains. The result was that® the 
Greeks decided that the war should henceforth be without 
heralds. As they went along, the Greeks could do no 
harm to the Persians, because they did not shoot far 


1 ἐπιτρέπω. 7 form... square = make a hollow square of the hoplites. 
8 for the van; do not use the Dative. +4 have fo: use δέω. Sin... of: 


ὡς. ὁ The result was that: ὥστε. 
GK. PROSE COMP. — II 


162 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


enough to reach them.! Moreover, whenever the Greeks 
tried to pursue, the Persians shot backwards as they rode. 


418. Sec. 11-20. 


When the Greeks saw that they could not reach the 
enemy with their missiles or overtake them in pursuit, 
they thanked? the gods, because the Persians had shown 
them what they needed. It happened that there were 
some Rhodians in the army who knew how to use the 
sling and who could shoot twice as far as the Persians. 
These, therefore, by the use of money,’ they formed into 
a company of two hundred slingers. They provided them- 
selves with cavalry also. 


BOOK III— CHAPTER IV 


419. Sec. 1-9. 


On the next day, the Greeks saw Mithridates coming 
with a large force. As was the case‘ in the former attack, 
he expected to do® much damage to the Greeks®; but they 
were more courageous now, because they had both cavalry 
and slingers. Accordingly, they were victorious, and cap- 
tured many of the Persians alive. There was in this place 
a city named Larissa, which was captured in ancient times 
by the Persians. 


420. Sec. 10-18: 


The city of Mespila’ also was once besieged by the Per- 
sian king, but he could not capture it by either siege or 


1 shoot... them: cf. the text at the end of sec. 7. 2 χάριν ἔχω and 
Dative. %édy... money = by giving money. * was the case; omit these 
three words. ὅ expected to do = thought that he would do, ὃ H. 725, a: Ὁ. 
1073: B. 340: Go. 534, @. 7 Do not use the Genitive. 


ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. IV 163 


assault. As the Greeks went on their journey,! Tissa- 
phernes came in sight with a large force, but he retreated 
very quickly, because the Rhodians shot a very long dis- 
tance and did not miss? their man. While the Greeks 
and Persians were skirmishing, the Greeks captured many 
bows, which proved useful to the archers. 


421. Sec. 19-24. 


After these skirmishes, it became evident that the hollow 
square threw the Greeks into confusion, for, whenever the 
road was too® narrow, or they had to cross a bridge, the 
hoplites were crowded out (of their places;$ Therefore 
they formed six companies to help the phalanx whenever 
the wings were drawn together or separated. 


422. Sec. 25-34. 


While the Greeks were marching through some? hills, 
the Persian slingers and archers wounded many of them 
by shooting down from the heights. But after the Greeks 
got above them, they feared that they would be surrounded, 
and fled. After this, the Greeks decided not to proceed 
and fight at the same time,® because’ there were many 
wounded. 


423. Sec. 35-41. 


The Greeks decided to break camp and march as far as 
possible during the night, for the Persians never encamped 
near the Greeks on account of fear® of an attack. On the 


1 went... journey: useone word. ? H. 748: G. 1099: B. 356: Go. 510. 
8 Comparative. +4 of their places: omit. ὃ Omit. 6 wot... time = not to 
proceed still fighting. ‘H.971,@: G. 1568. 8 Do not use the noun. ᾿ 


164 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


fourth day, however, the barbarians seized in advance! 
the spur of a mountain at the base of which they must 
pass. Xenophon thought that, if he could get possession 
of the summit of the mountain, the Persians would not be 
able to remain. 


424. Sec. 42-49. 


“Well, I will give you your choice,” said Chirisophus, 
“either to go to the summit or to remain with the army.” 
Xenophon chose to go, and took men from the van, and 
started immediately. When the enemy saw that he had 
set out, they too began to race to the summit. Xenophon 
said to his men, “ Have courage,? for after a little toil we 
shall reach home safely.” The Greeks reached the height 
before the enemy.® | 


BOOK III—CHAPTER V 


425. Sec. 1-Ὁ. 


The Persians then turned and fled. But the Greeks 
were discouraged when they saw that they had no place 
from which to take provisions, for the barbarians suddenly 
began to burn the villages. ‘I, at least,” said Chiriso- 
phus, “think we had better burn them also, so that they 
may stop all* the more quickly.” While the Greeks were 
in perplexity because of the depth of the river, a Rhodian 
came up and said that he would transport them across the 
river, if they would give him what he needed.® 


1 in advance. πρό in composition with the verb. * Have courage. θαρ- 
ρέω. %reached... enemy: see 169. * Omit. ὅ he... needed: what kind 
of a condition was used in the direct discourse? 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. I 165 


426. Sec. 10-18. 


_ The Rhodian said that he would build a bridge by using 
two thousand skins, each one of which would keep two 
men from sinking.! This device, however, seemed im- 
practicable to the generals. Then the Greeks went back 
toward Babylon, so that the enemy might not know what 
they intended? to do. After questioning the captives, the 
Greeks decided to cross the Carduchian mountains. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III, IV, AND V 


427. Follow the directions given in 295-297. 
The sight work should be connected prose. 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER I 


428. Sec. I-14. 


The Greeks entered the country? of the Carduchi as 
secretly as they could, for they feared that an attack 
would be made. At first, the Carduchi fled from the vil- 
lages, but later, a few of them suddenly assembled on the 
heights and fell upon the Greeks. If, however, at that 
time there had been more, I think that the majority of the 
Greeks would have been in danger of being destroyed. 


429. Sec. 15-28. 


Whenever the enemy attacked the rear guard as they 
were passing along, Xenophon sent along word to the van 
to wait; but on one occasion‘ the van did not halt. Xeno- 


1 from sinking: H. 748, 1029: G. 1117, 1615: B. 434: Go. 487. Also 
see 161. had in mind. ὅ. country of: omit. Use the Accusative with ἢ 
eis. * om one occasion: work. 


166 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


phon therefore went ahead to see what the trouble was, 
and saw that:Chirisophus was hurrying to seize! a certain 
steep road. The enemy, however, captured the pass first. 
Then a guide, on being questioned, told the Greeks that 
there was? another road, and a height which they must 
preoccupy. 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER II 
430. Sec. 1-13. 7 


Many, under the leadership of Callimachus, volunteered 
to capture this height. Then Xenophon made an attack 
on the enemy at the visible pass, so that the volunteers, 
while the enemy were directing their attention to this 
road, might go around without detection.? Afterwards, 
Xenophon and the volunteers, by a simultaneous attack,’ 
captured the pass. Then Xenophon, taking half of the rear 
guard, followed the guide, and came upon two hills which 
had been seized by the enemy, one of which he captured 
by forming the companies in column. 


431. Sec. 14-28. 


The barbarians, however, abandoned the third hill for 
fear that they would be surrounded. After the Greeks had 
united, Xenophon told the enemy that he would not burn 
their houses on condition that® they give up the dead. 
Whenever the barbarians troubled the van or the rear, 
Xenophon and Chirisophus helped each other. Some- 
times® the Cretans, too, were very useful. 


1 40 seize: see'79. 2 Should the Imperfect be used? 8 without detection: 
see 169. 4 dy... attack = attacking at the same time. *on... that: 
H. 999, a: G. 1460: B. 596: Go. 567. 9 Cf. Hv δὲ kal ὁπότε. 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. III 167 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER III 
432. Sec. I-II. 


On reaching! the Centrites river, the Greeks encamped” 
very gladly, nowthat they had endured so many hardships 
at the hands of the Carduchi. But the Greeks were greatly 
discouraged, for their situation was as follows: in front 
were horsemen who would keep them from crossing,” 
while in the rear the Carduchi were on the mountains 
ready to attack them. At this juncture,® two young men 
came running up and said that they had found a place 
where they thought it was safe to cross. 


433. Sec. 12-23. 


The young men said that they could cross at this point 
without wetting their waists. The Greeks, therefore, de- 
cided to try this ford. Xenophon then hit upon a plan‘; 
by running back along the river and by pretending to 
cross there, he frightened the enemy so much that® they 
did not prevent Chirisophus with the van from crossing. 
When they were on the other side, Chirisophus shouted 
to his soldiers not to pursue. 


434. Sec. 24-34. 


While the camp followers and the baggage train were 
in the act of ® crossing, the Carduchi were evidently com- 
ing down from the mountains. Xenophon then faced 
about and charged the Carduchi; but, as soon as they 


1 On reaching: should the Present Participle be used? ? from crossing: 
H. 963: G. 1549: B. 643: Go. 572,573. ὃ καιρός. *hit... plan = devised 
something. Use μηχανάομαι. ὅ so much that: 5εε 161. Sin... of: ἀκμήν. 


168 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


turned in flight, he wheeled to the right and crossed with 
his men as quickly as he could. In this way the Greeks 
all crossed this river safely, with the exception of a few 
who were wounded.! 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I, I, AND ΠῚ 


435. Follow the directions given in 309-311. 
The sight work should be.connected prose. 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER IV 
486. Sec. 1-13. 


When the Greeks were marching through western Arme- 
nia, its vice-satrap, Tiribazus, came up and said that he 
would make a treaty with them, if they would not burn 
his houses. While they were encamping, so much snow 
fell that it kept warm whomever? it fell upon. There 
Xenophon, by his example,’ made the soldiers get up* 
and split wood. 


437. Sec. 14-22. 


Democrates was a man who never reported as true 
whatever was not true. The Greeks, therefore, gave him 
men and sent him to find out what the fires were. On his 
return,” he said he had not seen any fires, but that he had 
learned that Tiribazus was preparing to attack them in 
the defiles of the mountains. As they were passing over 


1 with... wounded: Genitive absolute. 7 kept warm whomever = was a 
warm thing to, etc. ὃ What does example really mean? 4 make get up: 
compare the transitive and intransitive meanings of ἀνίστημι. ὃ On his 
return = having proceeded. 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. V 169 


the heights, they espied the camp of Tiribazus, and with a 
charge! they captured about twenty horses. 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER V 


438. Sec. I-II. 


The strong north wind and the deep snow destroyed 
many of the soldiers. There the soldiers did not act 
friendly toward one another, for those who had a plenty 
of wood said that they would not let the others come near 
the fire unless they shared? with them their wheat. After 
this, Chirisophus came upon some water carriers, who told 
him that the satrap was about a parasang distant. 


439. Sec. 12-22. 


As many as did not wear something black before their 
eyes, lost them on account of the snow,® and their shoes, 
too, froze on, if they did not unfasten them at night. The 
sick, however, were of some use, for they helped the rear 
guard frighten* the enemy by shouting as loud as they 
could. As Xenophon and his men went along, they found 
that all those in front had halted right in the snow. He 
tried to make them get up. 


440. Sec. 23-36. 


The underground houses of the Armenians seemed very 
strange to the Greeks. All sorts of animals were raised 
in them. Xenophon said to the ruler of the village, ‘‘ Lead 
us well until we leave your country, and I will not deprive® 


1 with a charge = having charged. 2 4H. 737: G. 1097, 2: B. 356: Go. 
510. %As...snow. see 109. 4 Compare the active and middle meaning 
of φοβέω. ὅ H. 724, 748, a: G. 1069, 1118: B. 340: Go. 535. 


170 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


you of your children.” The soldiers had a good time here, 
eating and drinking. Because Armenia had a large num- 
ber of very spirited horses, its tribute to the king consisted 
of horses. 


BOOK IV —CHAPTER VI 


441. Sec. I-13. 


Under the leadership of the mayor, they marched along 
at the rate of six parasangs a day until they reached a pass 
which was held by the. enemy. Chirisophus thought it 
best to charge the enemy immediately after breakfast.! 
Xenophon, however, wished to seize secretly? some part 
of the mountain, for he thought it was easier to go up 
a steep road at night than to fight on level ground in the 
daytime. 


442. Sec. 14-27. 


Now the Spartans practice stealing from early boyhood; 
therefore Xenophon thought that Chirisophus would be 
a man capable of ® seizing the height by stealth. Chiriso- 
phus, however, said: “We are not the only ones who 
know how to steal, for you Athenians are clever thieves.” * 
As they usually did, the Greeks called for volunteers and 
sent them to capture the mountain. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS IV, V, AND VI 


443. Follow the directions given in 321-323. 
The sight work should be connected prose. 
1 immediately after breakfast = as soon as they had eaten breakfast, * seize 


secretly: κλέπτω. 8 capable of: ἱκανός and Infinitive. 4 clever thieves = 
clever to steal. 


Ἷ 


ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. VIII ay 


| > 


- 


BOOK ΙΝ --- ΟΗΑΡΤΕᾺ VII 
᾿ 444, Sec. 1--14. 


When the Greeks arrived among the Taochi, they came 
upon a stronghold, which they had to take to get provi- 
sions. On account of an encircling! river, there was only 
one road, which the enemy protected by rolling down 
rocks. On consideration, Xenophon hit upon this device :? 
“Let us run forward,” said he, “until they begin to roll 
down stones, and then retreat quickly. In this way we 
would compel them to use up their rocks, and then we 
can capture the place.” This they did. 


445. Sec. 15-27. 


On leaving Gymnias, the Greeks had a guide who 
escorted them, not out of good will, but that he might 
persuade the Greeks to lay waste the land of his enemies. 
As Xenophon drew near® the mountain, he heard a loud 
shouting, and noticed that the noise became louder and 
louder as the army advanced. If he had ridden forward, 
he would have found the van embracing one another, and 
shouting, ‘‘ The sea, the sea.” 


BOOK IV—CHAPTER VIII 
446. Sec. I-13. 


The Greeks, through a former Athenian slave, who 
could talk with the Macronians, told them that they had 
waged war with the king, and were on their way to 


1 encircling = which was in a circle. *hit... device = devising the fol- 
Jowing. ὃ. drew near: πλησιάζω (Dative). 


[72 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION — PART III 


Greece. After this, the Macronians were very friendly. 
In attacking a large mountain among the Colchians, the 
Greeks did not employ the phalanx, but left a space 
between the companies. The object was to! prevent? the 
enemy from outflanking them. 


447. Sec. 14-28. 


Xenophon encouraged his soldiers as follows: “ Men, 
these are the only ones who prevent us from reaching 
home.® Let us make short work of them.”* The enemy 
were defeated, and fled in different directions. After 
this, the Greeks reached the sea without further hin- 
drance. Here for many days they were busy performing 
the vows which they had promised, and instituting athletic 
contests. 


REVIEW OF CHAPTERS VII AND VIII 


448. Follow the instructions given in 390-992. 
The sight work should be connected prose. 


1 The...to = they did this that. *See 162. “8 that...home: see text, 
sec. 14. * make...them.: do not translate this literally. What does this 
expression really mean? 


ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 


The student should consult a Greek-English vocabulary for the forms 


and fuller meanings of the Greek words here given. 


Figures in 


parentheses refer to sections of the book. 


A 


a, an, generally omitted, sometimes 
τὶς (4). 

able, ἱκανός, δυνατός (160); be —, 
δύναμαι. 

about, ἀμφί, περί (67). 

above, ὑπέρ. 

accompany, 
Géw. 

accomplish, ποιέω, katampaTtTw. 

accordingly, οὖν, δή (a post-posi- 
tive). 

account, on — of, did, ἕνεκα (after 
its word). 

admiral, στρατηγός. 

admire, θαυμάζω. 

advance, make an —, πϑρεύομαι, 
πρόσειμι. 

afraid, be —, φοβέομαι. 

after, μετά. 

again, πάλιν, ἔτι. 

against, πρός, ἐπί. 

aid, ὠφελέω, βοηθέω, peer 

all, πᾶς. 

alone, povos. 

along, παρά. 

also, x®i, before the word it em- 
phasizes. 


συνακολου- 


ἕπομαι, 


always, ἀεί. 

among, ἐν, εἰς. 

and, καί, δέ (a post-positive). 

angry, be —, ὀργίζομαι, χαλεπαίνω. 

announce, dyyéAAw, ἀπαγγέλλω. 

another, ἄλλος. 

any, anybody, 
(34, 2). 

appear, φαίνομαι. 

applaud, ἐπαινέω. 

approach, πλησιάζω; let —, προ- 
σΐημι. 

Ariaeus, ᾿Αριαῖος. 

arms, armor, ὅπλα. 

arm, to —, ὁπλίζω. 

army, στράτευμα, στρατιά, στρατός. 

arrive, ἀφικνέομαι, πάρειμι. 

arrow, τόξευμα. 

Artaxerxes, ᾿Αρταξέρξης. 

aS, ὡς. 

ashamed, feel —, αἰσχύνομαι. 

ask, (a question), ἐρωτάω; 
αἰτέω. 

assistance, give —, βοηθέω, ὠφε- 
λέω. 

αὖ, ἐν, πρός, ἐπί. 

attack, ἐπιτίθεμαι, ἐμβάλλω, ἔπει- 
μι. 

await, δέχομαι. 


any one, τὶς 


a73 


174 GREEK PROSE 


B 
back, πάλιν. 
bad, κακός. 
barbarian, βαρβαρικός, βάρβαρος. 
battle, μάχη; give —, μάχομαι. 
be, εἰμί; ---- present, πάρειμι, παρα- 
γίγνομαι. 
beautiful, καλός. 
because, ὅτι, ws; --- οὗ, διά (67). 
become, γίγνομαι. 
before, πρίν, πρόσθεν, πρό. 
begin, ἄρχω. 
behind, ὄπισθεν. 
believe, ἡγέομαι. 
benefit, ὠφελέω, εὖ ποιέω. 
beside, παρά. 
betray, προδίδωμι. 
blame, μέμφομαι. 
boat, πλοῖον. 
bow, τόξον; use the —, τοξεύω. 
bowman, τοξότης. 
boy, παῖς. 
brave, ἀγαθός, ἀνδρεῖος. 
bravely, καλῶς. 
bravery, ἀρετή. 
breadth, εὖρος. 
bridge, γέφυρα. 
brother, ἀδελφός. 
burn, κἄω, — up οἵ — down, 
κατακἄω. 
but, ἀλλά, δέ (a post-positive). 
buy, ἀγοράζω. 
by, ὕπο with genitive of agent ; ἐπί. 


Cc 
call, καλέω. 
camp, κατασκηνέω; στρατόπεδον. 
captain, λοχαγός. 
capture, αἱρέω, ἁρπάζω; be cap- 
tured, ἁλίσκομαι (89). 
care, take —, ἐπιμελέομαι. 


& 
COMPOSITION 


carefully, ἐπιμελῶς. 

catch, λαμβάνω; be caught, ἀλί 
σκομαι (89). 

cavalry, — man, ἱππεύς. 

cease, παύομαι. 

certain, a —, τὶς (4). 

chance, by —, generally use rvy: 
xavw (169). 

chariot, ἅρμα. - 

choose, αἱρέομαι. 

Cilicia, Κιλικία. 

citizen, πολίτης. 

city, πόλις. 

Clearchus, Κλέαρχος. 

collect, συλλέγω, ἀθροίζω. 

come, ἔρχομαι, have —, , ἥκω. 

command, κελεύω, ἄρχω. 

commander, ἄρχων, στρατηγός. 

congratulate, εὐδαιμονίζω. 

conquer, νϊκάω, κρατέω. 

consider, βουλεύομαι, σκέπτομαι. 

contest, ἀγών. 

country, χώρα. 

courage, ἀρετή. 

coward, κακός. 

cross, — over, διαβαίνω. 

Cyrus, Κῦρος. 


D 


danger, κίνδυνος. 

daric, dapetkds. 

daughter, θυγάτηρ. 

day, ἡμέρα. 

deceive, ψεύδω, ἐξαπατάω. 

deep, βαθύς. 

defeat, vixaw; be defeated, ἧττά 
ομαι. 

delay, διατρίβω. 

deliberate, βουλεύομαι. * 

die, ἀποθνήσκω, τελευτάω. 

discouraged, be —, ἀθύμέω. 


ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 


disobey, ἀπιστέω. 
distant, be —, ἀπέχω. 
do, ποιέω, πρᾶττω. 
door, θύρα. 

draw, --- up, τάττω. 
dread, ὀκνέω. 


Ψ 
each, ἐκαστος. 
either, —_ ) OO ew or, ἤ ee 
embark, ἐμβαίνω. 
enemy, πολέμιος ; the —, οἱ πολέ- 
μιοι. 
entire, πᾶς, ἅπας. 
’ 
envy, φθονέω. 
escape, ἀποφεύγω; --- notice of, 
λανθάνω (169). 
especially, μάλιστα. 
’ . 
even, καί (before the word it em- 
phasizes) ; not —, οὐδέ or μηδέ. 
€VEY, ποτέ, πώποτε. 
evident, δῆλος. 
evil, κακός. 


» 
. 1) 


F 
fall, γίγνομαι; — on, ἐμπίπτω. 
father, πατήρ. 
fear, φοβέομαι, δέδοικα; φόβος. 
fellow-soldiers, ἄνδρες στρατιῶ- 
ται, with or without ὦ. 
fight, μάχομαι, μάχη. σκέπτομαι. 
find, εὑρίσκω; --- out, σκοπέω, 
first, πρῶτος ; πρῶτον. 
flee, φεύγω. 
follow, ἕπομαι, ἀκολουθέω ; as fol- 
lows, proper case of ὅδε (33). 
food, σῖτος. 
foolish, ἠλίθιος. 
foot, πούς. 
foot-soldier, πεζός. 
for, γάρ (a post-positive). 


175 


| fourth, τέταρτος. 


friend, φίλος, ἕένος. 

friendly, φίλιος, φίλος. 

frighten, φοβέω; fear, φοβέομαι. 
from, ἐξ, παρά, ἀπό. 

furnish, πορίζω. 


G 


general, στρατηγός. 

get, γίγνομαι (in the sense of 
obtain), Tvyxavw, — possession, 
λαμβάνω. 

give, δίδωμι. 

glad, be —, ἥδομαι. 

gladly, ἡδέως. 

ZO, εἶμι, ἔρχομαι ; be gone, οἴχομαι. 

Βοοᾶ, ἀγαθός. 

great, μέγας, πολύς. 

Greek, Ἕλλην; Ἑλληνικός. 

guard, φύλαξ, φυλακή; φυλάττω. 

guide, ἡγεμών. 


Η 


happen, τυγχάνω (169), γίγνομαι. 

happy, εὐδαίμων ; deem ---, εὖδαι- 
μονίζω. 

harm, do —, κακῶς ποιέω, βλάπτω. 

have, ἔ ἔχω, dative of possessor with 
εἰμί (26). 

hear, ἀκούω. 

heavy-armed man, ὁπλίτης. 

height, ὕψος ; ἄκρον. 

her, oblique cases of αὐτή (51). 

herald, κῆρυξ. 

here, ἐνταῦθα, αὐτοῦ, δεῦρο. 

hereupon, ἐκ τούτου, ἐνταῦθα. 

hesitate, ὀκνέω. 

him, oblique cases οὗ αὐτός (45) ; 
if reflexive, ov (51). 

himself, ἑαυτοῦ (51); αὐτός (46). 

hinder, κωλύω. 


176 GREEK PROSE 

his, when not emphatic, use the 
article (3, 1); otherwise αὐτοῦ, 
ἐκείνου (51); — Own, ἑαυτοῦ 
(51). 

hold, ἔχω. 

honor, τιμή; τιμάω; in —, τέμιος. 

hope, ἐλπίς. 

hoplite, ὁπλίτης. 

horse, ἵππος. 

horseman, ἱππεύς. 

house, οἰκία. : 

how, πῶς, ὅπως (83); — many, 
πόσοι, ὁπόσοι; — large, ὅσος, 
ὁπόσος. 

hundred, ἑκατόν. 


I 
Ι͵ ἐγώ (44). 
if, εἰ, ἐάν, ἦν, ἄν. 
immediately, εὐθύς. 
in, ἐν, eis; — order that, iva, ὡς, 
ὅπως (80). 
inasmuch, see since. 
injure, βλάπτω. 
instead, — of, ἀντί. 
into, εἰς. 


J 


journey, ὅδός, πορεία; to make 
a —, πορεύομαι. 

judge, κρΐνω. 

just, δίκαιος. 

justice, δικαιοσύνη. 

justly, δικαίως. 


K 


Kill, dzroxteivw ; _be killed, dzo- 
΄σκω. 

king, βασιλεύς, be —, βασιλεύω. 

know, οἶδα (153), γιγνώσκω (89). 


COMPOSITION 


L 


large, μέγας, πολύς; how —, 
ὁπόσος. ι 

laugh, — at, καταγελάω. 

lead, ἄγω, ἡγέομαι. 

leader, ἡγεμών. 

learn, πυνθάνομαι, μανθάνω. 

least, at —, ye (a post-positive). 

leave, λείπω. 

leisure, be at —, σχολάζω. 

lest, μή (84). 

letter, ἐπιστολή. 

long, μακρός, πολύς. 

long, as — as, ἕως (129). 

loose, Avw. 

love, φιλέω. 


M 

make, ποιέω. 

man, ἄνθρωπος (homo), ἀνήρ (vir). 

manifest, φανερός, δῆλος. 

many, 50 --- τοσοῦτος, τοσόσδε. 

march, ἐλαύνω, πορεύομαι ; πορεία. 

mercenary, ἕενικός. 

messenger, ἄγγελος. 

middle, μέσος ; μέσον. 

miss, ἁμαρτάνω. 

more, μᾶλλον. 

mother, μήτηρ. 

much, πολύς ; πολύ. 

must, δεῖ, χρή, ἀνάγκη ἐστὶ, and 
the verbal in τέος (74, 75). 

my, ἐμός, sometimes ἐμοῦ οἵ pov; 
of mine, ἐμός (51). 

myself, ἐμαυτοῦ; when intensive, 
αὐτός (51). 


N 


near, παρά; πλησίον, ἐγγύς. 
necessary, it is —, δεῖ (74). 


ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 


need, δέομαι. 
NEVE, OUTOTE, μήποτε. 
night, νύξ. 


no, no one, nobody, οὐδείς, μη- 


deis. 


not, ov, μή; — only .. . but 
also, καὶ. . . καί. 
notice, escape — of, λανθάνω 


(169). 


now, viv; already, ἤδη. 


O 

obey, πείθομαι. 

on, ἐπί, ἐν; — account of, ἕνεκα, 
(after its word) διά. 

one, εἷς, τὶς (34, 2) ; — another, 
ἀλλήλων. 

or, ἤ. 

order, κελεύω ; in — that, ἵνα, ὡς, 
ὅπως (80). 

other, ἄλλος. 

ought, χρή, δεῖ (74). 

our, when not emphatic, by the 
article (3, 1); sometimes by 
ἡμῶν (51). 

overcome, κρατέω. 


τ 
palace, βασίλεια. 
parasang, παρασάγγης. 
pay, μισ θός. 
paymaster, μισθοδότης. 
perceive, αἰσθάνομαι. 
permit, ἐάω. 
Persian, Πέρσης ; Περσικός. 
persuade, πείθω. 
pity, οἰκτείρω. 
place, χωρίον ; take ---, γίγνομαι. 
plain, πεδίον, δῆλος. 
plan, βουλεύω ; βουλή. 
power, in the --- of, ἐπί. 

GK. PROSE COMP. — I2 


177 


praise, ἐπαινέω. 

present, be —, πάρειμι, mapayi- 
γνομαι. 

prevent, κωλύω. 

proceed, πορεύομαι, ἐξελαύνω. 

promise, or make a —, ὑπισχνέο- 
μαι. 

provisions, τὰ ἐπιτήδεια. 

pursue, διώκω. 


R 
read, ἀναγιγνώσκω (89). 
receive, λαμβάνω, δέχομαι. 
remain, μένω. 
remind, μιμνήσκω. 
reply, ἀποκρίνομαι. 
report, ἀπαγγέλλω. 
restrain, κατέχω. 
retaliate, ἀντιποιέω. 
ride, ἐλαύνω. 
rightly, δικαίως, ὀρθῶς. 
river, ποταμός. 
ruler, ἄρχων. 
run, τρέχω, θέω. 


Ss 

sail, set —, πλέω. 

sailor, ναύτης. 

same, 6 αὐτός (46). 

save, σῴζω. 

say, λέγω, φημί; said, εἶπον (139). 

sea, θάλαττα. 

see, dpdw ; — to, σκοπέω ; be seen, 
φαίνομαι. 

seem, or — best, δοκέω and da- 
tive. 

self, αὐτός (46). 

send, πέμπω; — for, μεταπέμπο- 
μαι. 

senseless, ἄφρων. 

set, — out or forth, ὁρμάομαι. 


178 GREEK PROSE 

seven, ἑπτά. 

shut, — up, κατακλείω; — Off, 
ἀποκλείω. 

since, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ὁπότε (64). 

six, ἕξ. 


skillful, δεινός. 

SO, οὕτως: --- as to, — that, 
ὥστε (158). 

soldier, στρατιώτης ; light-armed 
= γυμνής. 

some, somebody, Tis (34). 

sort, what —, ποῖος, οἷος. 

speak, λέγω. 

speech, λόγος. 

stadium or stade, στάδιον. 

stay, μένω. 

still, ἔτι. 

stop, παύω, ἀναπαύομαι. 

straightway, εὐθύς. 

successfully, καλῶς. 

such, οὗ — a kind, τοιοῦτος (of 
what precedes), τοιόσδε (of what 
follows). 

suffer, πάσχω; — harm, κακῶς 
πάσχω. 

swear, ὄμνυμι. 


T 


take, λαμβάνω; — place, yiyvo- 
μαι; be taken, ἁλίσκομαι (89). 

talent, τάλαντον. 

taste, γεύομαι. 

tell, λέγω. 

ten, δέκα. 

than, 7: 

that, ὅτι, μή (84); in order var 
iva, ws, ὅπως (80); 50 —, ὥστε 
(158); ἐκεῖνος (33) (the demon- 
strative pronoun). 

the, 6, 7, τό (1; 3). 


COMPOSITION 


their, sometimes by the article 
(3, 1); also αὐτῶν, ἐκείνων (51). 

them, oblique cases of αὐτός in 
plural (45). 

themselves, reflexive, ἑαυτῶν (47); 
intensive, αὐτοί (46); sometimes 
the middle voice. 

thence, ἐντεῦθεν. 

there, ἐνταῦθα, ἐκεῖ. 

therefore, οὖν, διὰ, τοῦτο 

thereupon, ἐνταῦθα, ἔνθα. 

they, generally omitted (42), some- 
times, ovTot, ἐκεῖνοι. 

think, “νομίζω, οἶμαι, δοκέω. 

this, οὗτος, ὅδε ( 480. 

thousand. χίλιοι. 

Thracian, Θράξ. 

three, τρεῖς. 

through, διά (67). 

throw, ῥίπτω, --- at, βάλλω. 

thus, οὕτως, ὦδε. 

Tissaphernes, Τισσαφέρνης. 

to, εἰς, πρός, παρά, ἐπί, ὡς (with 
persons). 

treaty, make a —, σπένδομαι. 

truce, σπονδαί. 

true, ἀληθής. 

try, πειράομαι. 

twenty, εἴκοσι. 

two, δύο. 


U 
until, ἕως, μέχρι, ἄχρι, ἔστε, πρίν 
(128). 
urge, παρακελεύομαι. 
use, χράομαι. 


ν 
valor, ἀρετή. 
van, στόμα; those in the —, οἱ 
ἔμπροσθεν. ᾿ 


ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 


vengeance, take — on, τιμωρέο- 
μαι. 

very, πάνυ. 

village, κώμη. 

virtue, ἀρετή. 


w 
wait, περιμένω. 
wall, τεῖχος. 
war, πόλεμος ; Carry on or make 
—, πολεμέω. 
well, cv. 
, Φ “ 
what, τίς (34), ὃς; ὁστις ; — sort, 
ποῖος. 
when, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ὅτε. 
3 ’ «ε / 
whenever, ἐπειδή, ὁπότε. 
° » ¢ 
where, ov, ἔνθα, ὅπῃ. 
which, ὅς. 
who, τίς (34), ὅς. 
whole, ὅλος. 
why, τί. 
width, εὖρος. 
wife, γυνή. 
willing, be —, βούλομαι, ἐθέλω. 


179 


wish, βούλομαι, ἐθέλω. 

with, σύν, μετά, ἔχων. 

within, ἔνδον. 

wonder, θαυμάζω. 

word, λόγος. 

worthy, ἄξιος. 

woman, γυνή. 

wrong, or be in the —, ἀδικέω. 


x 
Xenophon, Ξενοφῶν. 


p ὁ 
year, ἔτος. 
you, σύ (44). 
your, often by the article (3, 1), 
ὑμέτερος, σοῦ (51). 
yourself, reflexive, σεαυτοῦ (51) 
intensive, αὐτός (46). 


Ζ 


Zeus, Ζεύς, G. Διός, Ὁ. Au, A. Aia, 
V. Zev. 


SPECIMEN COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 
IN GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 


AMHERST COLLEGE, 1897 


1. Then he put Megaphernes to death, because he was 
plotting against him. 2. The king, hearing from Tissa- 
phernes of the preparations against him, was very angry. 
3. These Ionian cities, which originally belonged to Tissa- 
phernes, having been given him by the king, now belong 
to Cyrus. 4. Syennesis, the king of Cilicia, wishing to 
prevent Cyrus from entering his country, seized the pass 
over the mountains. 5. But a messenger came and told 
him that Menon had already led his army through the 
pass, and was marching on through the plain towards 
Tarsus. | 


BRYN MAwr COLLEGE, 1897 


When the Turks (Τοῦρκοι) attacked the Greeks in the 
last war, the latter were once encamped in a small village 
near the Peneios River. Fearing lest they should be 
encircled on both sides, the commander-in-chief of the 
Greek forces ordered the captains to summon their sol- 
diers, in order that he might address them. “Greeks,” 


he said, “let us rather die than be conquered.” 
| 180 


COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 181 


COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY, 1897 
A 


When after five days Chirisophus, who had been sent 
to Athens that he might bring thence provisions for the 
army, had not yet appeared, the generals would have 
marched down into the plain, had they not seen the 
enemy already there in large numbers. They decided 
therefore to remain upon the heights. 


B 


Let us command the soldiers to cross the river, that we 
may not appear more cowardly than the barbarians. 


CORNELL UNIVERSITY, 1896 


Here the Greeks were discouraged. For they saw that 
there were large rivers which they must pass, and they 
feared that the king would give them no leaders. But 
Xenophon said, ‘the king would gladly send us away, if 
he should see that we are not wishing to go. We must 
therefore make preparations to remain here.’”’ By such 
words Xenophon made his soldiers much braver. 


Scholarship Examination 


The Thebans, as it seems, wished to obtain the head- 
ship of Greece, and therefore decided to send Pelopidas 
as ambassador to the Persian king, to set forth the !advan- 
tages both to him and to them of his becoming their ally. 
They thought that the fact of their !refusal to follow Agesi- 
laus when he took up war against the king would *have 
great weight with him. Besides that, they could claim to 


182 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 


be no longer inferior to the Lacedaemonians, having won 
the victory at Leuctra. They imagined, therefore, that, 
if the king should aid them by declaring the autonomy 
of Messené and thus ‘menacing their enemies, they could 
obtain supremacy over all Greece. 

1 Translate by a verb. 

2 Translate by a conditional clause. 


3 = greatly contribute toward persuading him. 
4 ἐπιτειχίζω. 


DARTMOUTH COLLEGE, 1897 


Presently they hear the soldiers ahead of them on the 
heights shouting, ‘“‘The sea! the sea!’’ and passing the 
word along. Then they all broke into a run, even the rear 
guard. And as soon as they reached the summit they fell 
into one another’s arms, weeping for joy. 

Xenophon proceeds to tell how the Greeks gave their 
guide many gifts before dismissing him. After he had 
pointed out to them a village where they were to find 
quarters, and the road leading to it, toward evening he 
took his departure. A few days later they reached Tra- 
pezus, where they offered the sacrifice which they had 
vowed. 


HARVARD COLLEGE, 1897 


Once, when Xerxes was marching into Europe and the 
Greeks saw! many grave? dangers before them, they sent 
an embassy® to Crete and asked the Cretans‘ to help 
them against the Great King. The Cretans immediately 
dispatched messengers to Delphi to ask the god whether ὃ 
they should gain any advantage if they went to the aid of 
Greece. And Apollo answered, ‘ You Cretans seem not 


COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 183 


to remember that the Greeks have already received many 
benefits at your hands, for which they feel no gratitude. 
For your ancestors joined with them in their expedition 
against Troy, when the wife of Menelaus was carried off® 
by a barbarian. Nevertheless, when your own King Minos 
was murdered in Sicily, they refused to help you in pun- 
ishing’ his murderers.8”’ | 

When the Cretans heard that, they were so angry at the 
Greeks that they refused to help them, and took® no part 
in the war with” the Persians. — Cf. HERop. VII, 169. 


1 saw before them: use προφαίνομαι. ὃ ἁρπαζω. 

2 great. 7 τιμωρέομαι. 

3 ambassadors. ὃ φονεύς. 

4 Ἰζρής, Κρητός. 9 have part, μετέχω. 
5 if it would prove (become) better for them. 10 πρός. 


LELAND STANFORD JUNIOR UNIVERSITY, 1896 


Translate into Greek: 


When Cyrus marched against his brother, he took with 
him ten thousand Greeks and many barbarians. The 
Greeks conquered easily, but Ariaeus and the barbarians 
fled. Cyrus himself was killed in the battle, and not long 
afterwards most of the Greek generals were seized. They 
were then without generals or guides and in the midst of 
a hostile country ; but they showed themselves brave men 
and conquered all their foes. | 


¥ 
PRINCETON COLLEGE, 1897 


Cyrus and his army remained twenty days in that 
place. The soldiers were unwilling to proceed, because 


184 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 


they thought he was marching against the king. Clear- 
chus tried to persuade them, telling them that Cyrus had 
honored him and would honor them, if they would obey. 
If you do not wish to go, I shall remain with you, that 
you may know my good will (εὐνοία) towards you. Clear- 
chus would not have been a brave man, if he had not 
spoken to his soldiers. Let him be honored. 


VASSAR COLLEGE, 1897 


Let us try to return to Hellas as quickly as possible, 
for I fear, if we remain in this country much longer, we 
shall forget the way homeward. And it is not the part 
of brave men to flee from danger, but to prefer to die 
nobly rather than to live basely. 

He said that they ought to burn up all their wagons, 
if they intended to march quickly; otherwise these would 
be inconvenient to transport, while they would be in no 
way helpful in battle. 


WELLESLEY COLLEGE, 1897 


And Cyrus called together his generals and_ said: 
“Xenias and Pasion have left us; but let them clearly 
understand that they have neither run away, for I know 
where they have gone; nor have they escaped, for I have 
triremes so as to take their boat. But I, for my part, will 
not pursue them, nor shall any one say that I use a man 
as long as he may be with me, but whenever he wishes to 
go away I seize him and abuse him and take away his 
money. But let them go knowing that they are more 
disloyal toward us than we are toward them. And I have 
their wives and children under guard (lit. being guarded); 


COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 185 


but not even of these shall they be deprived, but they 
shall receive them back on account of their former loyalty 
(ἀρετή) toward me.” 


WILLIAMS COLLEGE, 1897 


Translate into Greek the following passage (which is 
based upon the previous passage [ Azad. VII, vi, 1-6]): 


Since Thibron was in need of generals and captains, 
he offered to the former (τοῖς μέν) four darics a month, 
and to the latter (τοῖς dé), two, if they would take-the-field 
against the army of Tissaphernes. When they learned 
that Seuthes was not in need of them and would no longer 
promise them wages, they said that they would gladly 
withdraw from his country. And so early the next morn- 
ing the soldiers were collected together at the call of 
Xenophon (gen. absol.). And they also offered no oppo- 
sition. And so the whole army of the Greeks hurried-off- 
with (συντρέχω) the messengers (ἄγγελος) in order that 
they might not be deprived (ἀποστερέω) of wages. 


YALE COLLEGE, 1897 


Translate into Attic Greek: 


In the battle the Persians killed Cyrus; and the king, 
therefore, thinking the victory his, sent heralds to the 
Greeks to command them to surrender! their arms. But 
the Greeks were indignant at this,? and said to the heralds: 
“Tf the king thinks he is victorious, let him come and take 
our arms. But if we should surrender them out of friend- 
ship, what will he give us in return? If Cyrus were living, 
he would already be king in place of? his brother; for. 


186 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 


whoever defeats 10) enemy, as we have you, dictates the 
terms‘ of peace.” 
Where does that young man live ihe stands by the 


door? 


I παραδίδωμι. 7 Literally, dove this heavily. ὃ ἀντί. 
4 Literally, ¢edls on what (condition) there shall be peace. 


UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, 1897 


Elementary Prose Composition 


Translate into Greek: 


(4) Go and ask Cyrus for a boat, that you may sail back. 

(4) Since it is necessary for you to go with me, do not 
abandon me. 

(c) Let some one ask the general what he wants. 

(4) The king thought that the enemy would fight on the 
same day. 

(4) He does not fear that he will not conquer his brother. 

(7) Let the king come himself and take our arms, if he 
wants them. 


Advanced Prose Composition 


Translate into Greek: 


The messengers, when they had heard this, went away 
and came back quickly; and by this it was evident that 
the king was somewhere near, or some one else upon 
whom it had been enjoined to do this; and they said that 
they seemed to the king to speak what was reasonable, 
and had come with guides, who, if a truce should be made, 
would lead them to a place from which they could get pro- 
visions. 


COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 187 


But he asked them whether there was a truce just for 
the men who were coming and going, or whether there 
would be a truce for the rest also. They replied: “ For 
all, until your message be reported to the king.” 

Now, when they said this, Clearchus sent for them and 
deliberated ; and it seemed best to make the truce quickly, 
and quietly to go to the provisions and take them. 


UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, 1897 


Translate: When Cyrus determined to march against 
his brother, he collected together as large an army as he 
could and summoned several Greek generals to join him, 
for he believed the Greeks to be far superior to the Per- 
sians in war (τὰ πολεμικά). But he did not at first tell 
them his purpose. So when the Greeks began-to-suspect 
at length that they were marching against the king, they 
refused to go further, and claimed they had not been hired 
for this. Clearchus, one of the Greek generals, attempted 
to compel his soldiers to march on; but they not only 
refused to do so when ordered, but flung stones at him, 
so that he barely escaped being killed. Later, he called 
his soldiers to a meeting and, attempting to address them, 
burst-into-tears, and could-not-speak (was silent) for a long 
᾿ time, so that his men wondered (to see him). At length 
he said: “Soldiers, Cyrus has been a good friend to me; 
he has honored me highly when I was an exile from my 
native land, and I have promised to help him in return. 
But without you (ἔρημος and gen.) I can neither help a 
friend nor punish an enemy.” 


ἐ- 
Ly 


+ τ < 


A Grammar of Attic and 


Ionic Greek 


By FRANK COLE BABBITT, Ph.D. (Harvard) 


Professor of the Greek Language and Literature, Trinity College, Hartford ; 
formerly Fellow of the American School of Classical Studies at Athens. 


PRICE, $1.50 


HIS grammar states the essential facts and principles of the Greek 
language in concise form, with only so much discussion as may 
reasonably be demanded for a clear understanding of the subject. 

It therefore meets the wants of secondary schools and at the same time 
is sufficient for all ordinary demands of the college course. 


A Modern Grammar.—The book incorporates the results of 
the more recent philological studies, and includes many departures 
from conventional presentation. Due regard is paid to the fact that 
analogy plays an-important part in language, and that the context is 
often more important than grammatical rules in determining the exact 
significance of mode or tense. 


Treatment of Cases.—The treatment of cases is thoroughly log- 
ical and clear. ‘The true genitive and the ablative genitive are dis- 
tinguished from each other and considered separately ; likewise the 
true dative, the locative dative, and the instrumental dative. In this 
way much confusion is avoided. 


Rules of Agreement.—The general rules of agreement are first 
given in a preliminary paragraph and are then followed by a general 
statement regarding attraction and constructio ad sensum, and its appli- 
cation to substantives, adjectives, verbs, etc. 


Treatment of Modes.—The general significance of each mode is 
summarized briefly at the beginning, with its uses grouped and treated 
under the head of statements, questions, wishes, commands, etc. The 
various forms of statement are taken up and contrasted, thus allowing 
the student to perceive at a glance their similarities and differences. 


Classes of Verbs.—While every portion οὗ grammar has been 
simplified as much as possible, the notice of teachers is directed 
especially to the fact that the verbs have been reduced to five classes. 
In spite of this, however, nothing has been sacrificed in the process. 


Indirect Discourse.—The subject of indirect discourse is put at 
the end of syntax, and the principles have been fully stated in their 
proper places. The general principles are clearly enunciated, followed 
by the details with numerous examples. 


Syntactical Usage.—Tables of syntactical usage for reference are 
included to make it ees for the pupil to perceive the normal 
usage δ ἃ glance. 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, Publishers. 


(284) 


Xenophon’s Anabasis 
SEVEN BOOKS 


EDITED BY 
WILLIAM R. HARPER, Ph D., D.D., LL.D. 
President of the University of Chicago 
AND 


JAMES WALLACE, Ph.D. 
President of Macalester College, St. Paul, Minn. 


Cloth, 12mo, 575 pages, with Maps, Diagrams, etc. . Price, $1.50 


This edition of the Anabasis embodies all those features 
which have made Harper’s Classical Series so popular and 
successful, and in addition possesses many other points of 
special value to students of Xenophon. Apart from the 
text proper the book includes a Descriptive and Historical 
Introduction on Persia and Greece; a concise life of 
Xenophon; Bibliography; Itinerary; Inductive Exercises 
in Greek; Themes for Investigation; Lists of Words; 
Idioms; Ready Reference Tables, giving inflections of 
various parts of speech, including paradigms of Infinitives, 
Participles, and Irregular Verbs ; and a Complete Vocab- 
ulary of all the words used in the seven books. 

Books I-IV are edited with full Grammatical Refer- 
ences, Topics for:Study, and Critical Notes. 

Books V-—VII are edited for Sight Reading, with sug- 
gestions and foot-notes. 


Copies sent, prepaid, to any address on receipt of the price. 


American Book Company 


New York . Cincinnati ν᾿ Chicago 
(293) 


Greek Dictionaries 


LIDDELL AND SCOTT’S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON 
Revised and Enlarged. Compiled by HENRY GEORGE LIDDELL 
D.D., and RoBert ΘΟΟΤΎ, D.D., assisted by HENRY DRISLER, 
LL.D. Large Quarto, 1794 pages. Sheep. : . $10.00 
The present edition of this great work has been thoroughly revised, 
and large additions made to it. The editors have been favored with the 
co-operation of many scholars and several important articles have been 
entirely rewritten. 


LIDDELL AND SCOTT’S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON—Intermediate 


Revised Edition. Large Octavo, 910 pages. 
Cloth, $3.50: Half Leather, $4.00 


This Abridgment is an entirely new work, designed to meet the 
ordinary requirements of instructors. It differs from the smaller 
abridged edition in that it is made from the last edition of the large 
Lexicon, and contains a large amount of new matter. 


LIDDELL AND SCOTT’S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXiCON—Abridged 
Revised Edition. Crown Octavo, 832 pages. Half Leather $1.25 


This Abridgment is intended chiefly for use by students in Secondary 
and College Preparatory Schools. 


THAYER’S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 


Being Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti. Translated, 
Revised, and Enlarged by JosEpPH HENRY THAYER, D.D., LL.D. 
Royal Quarto, 727 pages . Cloth, $5.00; Half Leather, $6.50 
This great work embodies and represents the results of the latest 
researches in modern philology and biblical exegesis. It traces histori- 
cally the signification and use of all words used in the New Testament, 
and carefully explains the difference between classical and sacred usage. 


YONGE’S ENGLISH-GREEK LEXICON 


By Ὁ. D. YonGE., Edited by HENRY DRISLER, LL.D. 
Royal Octavo, 903 pages. Sheep. , ὦ . ς $4.50 


AUTENRIETH’S HOMERIC DICTIONARY 


Translated and Edited by RoBErRT P. KEEP, Ph.D. New Edition. 
Revised by Isaac FLaGG, Ph.D. 
I2mo, 312 pages. Illustrated. Cloth . ‘ . . $1.10 


Copies sent, prepaid, to any address on receipt of the price 


American Book Company 


New York Cincinnati Chicago 


(at! 


A GREEK PRIMER 


By CLARENCE W. GLEASON, A.M. (Harvard ) 
of the Roxbury Latin School ° 


Price, $1.00 


ITH many modifications suggested by class-room ex- 
périence, this book continues the general plan of Gleason 
_and Atherton’s First Greek Book. 

It develops the verb somewhat more slowly and naturally, 
with the second aorist still farther to the fore. The number of 
lessons has been increased, especially in order to give more 
practice on verb forms. ‘The infinitive and participle and 
indirect discourse are treated at greater length. ‘Three lessons 
are devoted entirely to Greek equivalents of common Latin 
constructions. 

Although the book is intended as an introduction to the 
study of Greek, rather than as a short cut to the Anabasis of 
Xenophon, the latter work has been drawn on freely for reading 
matter. ᾿ 

The reading selections in and following the lessons are 
intended to arouse the beginner’s interest in Greek literature, 
and for that end are taken from as varied sources as possible. 
To facilitate the acquisition of a permanent vocabulary, both 
Greek and English vocabularies contain references to the lesson 
vocabulary where the words first occur. 


BOOKS BY C. W. GLEASON | 
A Greek Primer ‘ ‘ ‘ ; $1.00 


The Story of Cyrus . : ; : to 
Xenophon’s Cyropaedia Σ ἢ Γ 1.25 
A Term of Ovid , , ; 15 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
NEW YORK CINCINNATI CHICAGO 
BOSTON ATLANTA DALLAS SAN FRANCISCO 
(281) 


Τὴν δὴν; 
ne: 


ἡ ΟΣ, 
" ἮΝ τ 
, or Ἢ 


Pil 
i « 


τὰ 


7 é ΡῚ ᾿" 
5a Mik ’ 
Jay A 
AA eet 


4 


P 
DER Fu ae = 
ΠῚ ‘ Ὁ 
7 "Ἰὼ 4 : 
a ‘ ν 


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 


Return to desk from which borrowed. 
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 


JAN2 5 1954 LU 


- 


LD 21-100m-7,’52 (Α2528516)476 


YB 0028| 


= 


πο αν, ΤῊΣ 
a 


¥ { 
i y 
a " 
‘ ) is 
i 
Γ 
) op iy 3 
*« 
” f Wit ‘ , 
‘ 
ἢ 
/ 2 t 
iy » 
᾿ i as 
τα 
\ } : : 
5 εἰ ν᾿ P 
1 “ 
PRiLie Sees 
i yi ahs 
* 4 
fe £5 } ν if ΝΙΝ ἢ ΜΕΥ εἰς i ’ i AL ι ὶ 
wh BPP y { ‘ , / : \) ἣ Ai it) Dead id a  ¢ ᾿ ΣΝ } Koon +s 
aS 
δι ἱ 
ir τ 
La by 
‘ s 
δ... ἢ 
ν yr 5 
Ν " 
Ι} 
᾿ ‘ 
͵ 


Me ne) ΜᾺ 
Sane \ 
yh virronie t wy 
Hi “ἢ 1 Ἂ 
ῳ ity ‘ 


᾿ hid 
on 


a fa) 
") 


inh 


ἮΝ 


x ἩΜΡἢ 


Hy 
Fah Noe 


ἜΣ 


hea 
sae 
Bit ny 


ty 
i) 


Ss 


me 
Ξ 


a 


